KYOCERA-TASKALFA-3252ci-SERVICE MANUAL
KYOCERA-TASKALFA-3252ci-SERVICE MANUAL
KYOCERA-TASKALFA-3252ci-SERVICE MANUAL
3252ci/3552ci
4052ci/5052ci
6052ci
PF-7100/7110/7120
DP-7100/7110/7120
DF-7100/7110/7120
AK-7100/MT-730(B)/BF-730/
JS-7100/PH-7A/PH-7C
PH-7100/PH-7120
FAX System 12
Printing System 15
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in $XJ 2016
2NDSM94
5HYLVLRQ
CAUTION
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires
municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
CONTENTS
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
(1) Common function ................................................................................................................ 1-1
(2) Copy Functions.................................................................................................................... 1-4
(3) Printer Functions ................................................................................................................. 1-6
(4) Scanner Functions............................................................................................................... 1-7
(5) Option .................................................................................................................................. 1-8
(5-1) Document Processor.................................................................................................. 1-8
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) .................................................................................... 1-8
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet × 2) .................................................................. 1-9
(5-4) Side Feeder (3,000-sheet) ......................................................................................... 1-9
(5-5) Inner finisher............................................................................................................... 1-9
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) ................................................................................ 1-10
(5-7) 1,000-Sheet Finisher ................................................................................................ 1-10
(5-8) 4,000-Sheet Finisher ................................................................................................ 1-11
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................ 1-11
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher).......................................................................... 1-12
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................................... 1-12
(5-12) Job Separator Tray................................................................................................... 1-13
(5-13) Banner Tray.............................................................................................................. 1-13
(5-14) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-13
1-2 Part Names............................................................................................................................. 1-15
(1) Machine ............................................................................................................................. 1-15
(1-1) Exterior ..................................................................................................................... 1-15
(1-2) Connectors/Interior................................................................................................... 1-17
(1-3) With Optional Equipments Attached......................................................................... 1-18
(1-4) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-19
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys .............................................................................................. 1-20
1-3 Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................ 1-21
(1) Option ................................................................................................................................ 1-23
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan)
DP-7120 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan) (Option for Low-end model)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover" ............................................................. 1-23
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox" ................................................................................................ 1-23
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-23
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-23
(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"Folding Unit............................................................................ 1-23
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (550-sheet x2)" .................................................................. 1-23
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,750-sheet×2)" ................................................. 1-23
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,500-sheet)" ...................................................................... 1-23
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"............................................................................... 1-23
(1-10) DP-7100 "Inner finisher"........................................................................................... 1-23
(1-11) PH-7100, PH-7120, PH-7130 "Punch Unit".............................................................. 1-24
(1-12) PH-7A, PH-7C, PH-7D "Punch Unit" ........................................................................ 1-24
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator".......................................................................................... 1-24
(1-14) NK-7100, NK-7110 "Optional Numeric Keypad" ...................................................... 1-24
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table".................................................................................. 1-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2 - 2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items .............................................................................. 2-4
(1-1) Main unit..................................................................................................................... 2-4
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items(option units) ......................................................... 2-5
(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-5
(2-2) Paper Feeder (PF-7110) ............................................................................................ 2-6
(2-3) Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120) .................................................................................... 2-7
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ................................................................................ 2-8
(2-5) Document Processor (DP-7110) ................................................................................ 2-9
(2-6) Document Processor (DP-7120): Low-end model only ............................................ 2-10
(2-7) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .......................................................................................... 2-11
(2-8) 1,000-sheets Finisher (DF-7120) ............................................................................. 2-12
(2-9) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ............................................................................... 2-13
(2-10) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 2-14
(2-11) Center-Folding Unit (BF-730) ................................................................................... 2-15
(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7B).................................................................................................. 2-16
(2-13) Punch Unit (PH-7110) .............................................................................................. 2-17
(3) Notes on main unit transportation...................................................................................... 2-18
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame.................................................................... 2-19
(5) Release of lift plate stopper ............................................................................................... 2-20
(6) Attaching the sub tray........................................................................................................ 2-21
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only) .............................................. 2-21
(8) Optional unit installation .................................................................................................... 2-22
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable ......................................................................................... 2-23
(10) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)............................................................. 2-25
(11) Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 2-27
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper................................................................................... 2-27
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette.......................................................................................... 2-28
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes................................................... 2-31
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder...................................................................... 2-34
(11-5) Set paper in the side feeder ..................................................................................... 2-36
(12) Connecting the Power Cord .............................................................................................. 2-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model) .................................................................................. 3-1
(2) Cross-section view (High-end model).................................................................................. 3-2
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................... 3-3
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) ........................................................................ 3-3
(2) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7110) ........................................................................ 3-3
(3) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7120) ........................................................................ 3-4
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100) .......................................................... 3-5
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110) .......................................................... 3-5
(6) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7120) : Low-end model only ........................ 3-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ....................................................................................... 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container ............................................................................................. 4-1
(4) Screening of the toner container ......................................................................................... 4-2
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................... 4-3
(1) Maintenance kits.................................................................................................................. 4-3
(1-1) Low-end model........................................................................................................... 4-3
(1-2) High-end Model .......................................................................................................... 4-5
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ............................... 4-7
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures .......................................................................... 4-10
(1) Cassette paper feed section.............................................................................................. 4-10
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ......................... 4-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(1-11) Detaching and reattaching the right cover assembly ............................................... 4-72
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 4-79
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the LSU ......................................................................... 4-79
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the lens unit ................................................................... 4-93
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit.................................................................. 4-96
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires ........................................................ 4-101
(3) Drive section.................................................................................................................... 4-109
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit........................................................ 4-109
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit (Low-end model) ........................... 4-111
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit (High-end model) .......................... 4-116
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the container motor ..................................................... 4-120
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit ........................................... 4-127
(3-6) Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit....................................................... 4-138
(4) Others.............................................................................................................................. 4-145
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD ....................................................................... 4-145
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the hard disk: Except Low-end model
(100V, 220-240V model) ........................................................................................ 4-147
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the lift motor................................................................. 4-150
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit.............................................. 4-153
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the eject unit ................................................................ 4-155
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching waste toner box unit: Low-end model.......................... 4-156
(4-7) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit: High-end model................... 4-170
(4-8) Fan motor attachment direction.............................................................................. 4-184
(5) PWBs............................................................................................................................... 4-185
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB (Low-end model) .............................. 4-185
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB (High-end model).............................. 4-188
(5-3) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ............................................................. 4-191
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (Low-end model) ............. 4-197
(5-5) Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (High-end model) ............ 4-200
(5-6) Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB..................................... 4-203
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power PWB (Low-end model) ............ 4-210
(5-8) Detaching and reattaching the lower voltage power PWB (High-end model) ........ 4-215
(5-9) Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB.................................................................. 4-220
(5-10) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB ............................................ 4-226
4-7 Disassembly & Reassembly (option) .................................................................................... 4-231
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)................................................................................................... 4-231
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .......................................................... 4-231
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ........................................................... 4-232
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB........................................................ 4-234
(2) Paper feeder (PF-7110)................................................................................................... 4-235
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .......................................................... 4-235
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ........................................................... 4-237
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB........................................................ 4-240
(3) Sidefeeder (PF-7120) ...................................................................................................... 4-241
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .......................................................... 4-241
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ........................................................... 4-242
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB........................................................ 4-244
(4) Document processor (DP-7100)...................................................................................... 4-245
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor.............................................. 4-245
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-249
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update....................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ....................................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ...................................................................................................... 6-2
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ............................................................................. 6-9
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure......................................................................................... 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)......................................................................... 7-2
(2-1) Abnormal image ......................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-2) The background is colored. ........................................................................................ 7-5
(2-3) Black or color spots appear on the image. ................................................................. 7-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB (High-end model)..................................................................................... 8-1
(1) Main PWB (High-end model)............................................................................................... 8-1
(1-1) Connector position ..................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
(1) Repetitive defects gauge ..................................................................................................... 9-1
(2) Firmware environment commands ...................................................................................... 9-2
(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures ............................................................................. 9-10
(4) Wiring diagram (High model)............................................................................................. 9-13
(4-1) Engine PWB / Drive PWB ........................................................................................ 9-13
(4-2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ................... 9-14
(4-3) Feed image PWB (Front side).................................................................................. 9-15
(4-4) Feed image PWB (Rear side) .................................................................................. 9-16
(4-5) Feed Drive PWB....................................................................................................... 9-17
(4-6) Drum-developer relay PWB...................................................................................... 9-18
(4-7) Low voltage power supply PWB / High voltage PWB............................................... 9-19
(4-8) Fuser PWB ............................................................................................................... 9-20
(4-9) Operation panel PWB / Main PWB........................................................................... 9-21
(5) Wiring diagram (Low model).............................................................................................. 9-22
(5-1) Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB ............................................................................... 9-22
(5-2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ................... 9-23
(5-3) Feed image PWB (Front side).................................................................................. 9-24
(5-4) Feed image PWB (Rear side) .................................................................................. 9-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10 Installation Guide
PF-7100 (500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
PF-7110 (1500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
PF-7120 (3000 sheets Side Paper Feeder)
DP-7100 (Document processor: RADF)
DP-7110 (Document processor: CIS)
DP-7120 (Document processor: RADF)
DF-7100 (Inner Finisher)
DF-7110 (4000 sheets Finisher)
DF-7120 (1000 sheets Finisher)
AK-7100 (Bridge Unit)
MT-730(B) (Mail Box)
BF-730 (Center Folding Unit)
PH-7 A/B/C/D (Punch Unit)
PH-7100/7110/7120/7130(Punch Unit)
JS-7100 (Job separator)
FAX System 12 (FAX Kit)
Printing System 15 (PRINT Kit)
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Description
Product name 25 ppm model / 32 ppm model / 35 ppm model / 40 ppm model / 50 ppm model /
60 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Pur- 52 to 300 g/m2
pose Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Pur- Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycled,Preprinted, Bond,
pose Tray Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Coated,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Pur- A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
pose Tray ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
1-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Items Description
Warm-up Time Power on 25 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
(23°C/73.4°F, 32 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
60%) 35 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
Low Power 25 ppm model: 10 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 10 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 15 seconds or less
Sleep 25 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 16 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 17 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1
500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Pur- 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)
pose Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m2)
55 sheets (lager than A4/Letter)(64 g/m2)
50 sheets (lager than A4/Letter)(80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48"))(136 to 163 g/m2)
Output Tray Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Job separa- 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
tor
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Light source LED array
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor 25 ppm model: OPC drum (diameter 30 mm)
32 ppm model: OPC drum (diameter 30 mm)
35 ppm model: a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
40 ppm model: a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
50 ppm model: a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
60 ppm model: a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact charger roller method
Developer system 25 ppm model: Non-magnetic dual-component developing system
32 ppm model: Non-magnetic dual-component developing system
35 ppm model: Touch down developing system
40 ppm model: Touch down developing system
50 ppm model: Touch down developing system
60 ppm model: Touch down developing system
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
1-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Items Description
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method
Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Impressing DC voltage)
Cleaning system Drum 25 ppm model: Counter blade
32 ppm model: Counter blade
35 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
40 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
50 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
60 ppm model: Counter blade + cleaning roller
Primary Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system
transfer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system
Heat source: IH
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
Memory 4.0 GB
Large capacity storage 25 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB*4)
32 ppm model: SSD 32 GB (SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB*4)
35 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
40 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
50 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
60 ppm model: SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB) *3
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 302.3az supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2*2
Fax: 2*3
Wireless LAN: 1
Operating Envi- Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
ronment
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 602 × 665 × 790 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"
Weight 25 / 32ppm model: Approx. 89 kg / Approx. 196.3 lbs (without toner container)
35/ 40 /50/ 60 ppm model: Approx. 92 kg / Approx. 196.3 lbs (without toner con-
tainer)
Space Required (W × D) 920 × 665 mm / 36.23" × 26.19" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz 12 A
230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
*2: When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3: When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
*4 This is standard in South and North America.
1-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
1-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Items Description
Copy Speed 50 ppm Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
model A4/Letter 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min 35 sheets/min
A5-R 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min 25 sheets/min
60 ppm Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
model A4/Letter 60 sheets/min 55 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 42 sheets/min 38 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
B4 36 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min 33 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min 55 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min 38 sheets/min
A5-R 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min 27 sheets/min
First Copy Time Black and 25 ppm model: 6.4 seconds or less
Time White 32 ppm model: 5.3 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 35 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
platen, feed from 40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Cassette) 50 ppm model: 3.7 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.4 seconds or less
Color 25 ppm model: 8.5 seconds or less
32 ppm model: 7.0 seconds or less
35 ppm model: 5.9 seconds or less
40 ppm model: 5.9 seconds or less
50 ppm model: 4.8 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 4.4 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed
1-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
1-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows
Server 2008 R2/
Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows
8/Windows 8.1/
Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows 2012 R2
1-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) Option
(5-1) Document Processor
Items Description
dual reverse scan dual scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7120 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/State- Minimum: A5-R/State- Minimum: A6-R/State-
ment-R (105 × 148 mm) ment-R (140 × 182 mm) ment-R (105 × 148 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m²
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m²
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 50 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 (50 to 80 g/m2)*1 (50 to 80 g/m2)*1
Dimensions (W × D × H) 593 × 531 × 138.5 mm / 600 × 502 × 128 mm / 600 × 513 × 170 mm /
23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46" 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46" 23.35" × 20.91" × 5.46"
Weight Approx. 9 kg / Approx. Approx. 7.5 kg / Approx. Approx. 14.5 kg / Approx.
19.9 lbs 19.9 lbs 19.9 lbs
1-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Description
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
600 × 600 dpi
Print: 1200 × 1200 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1,000 keys
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Image Memory Capacity Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Multi port, internet FAX kit
1-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-2) Connectors/Interior
1-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
07 %
3/$7(1&29(5
7<3((
3+$3+& 3+3+
3+' 3+
')
') %DQQHU*XLGH
-6 3)
')
*: If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120
1-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3ULQWLQJ6\VWHP
.H\ERDUG+ROGHU
,%
,%
6RIWZDUHRSWLRQ
,QWHUQHW)$;.LW $
'DWD6HFXULW\.LW (
8* ,%
8*
+'
6FDQ([WHQVLRQ.LW $
86%.H\ERDUG
1-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1) Option
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan)
DP-7120 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan) (Option for Low-end model)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
1-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-17) Printing System 15 "Fiery Controller" (Option for 32ppm/ 35ppm/ 40ppm/ 50ppm/
60ppm model)
When the Fiery Controller is installed, the regular print function of a machine can be replaced with the print function of
the Fiery Controller. The Fiery Controller print functions enable a variety of printing features that are not possible on a
regular machine, such as advanced color management that reproduces the true color of the image by reading each
machine's color display method and characteristics at the time of printing.
1-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power requirements:
AC100V50/60Hz15A or more
AC110V60Hz15A or more
AC120V60Hz12A or more
AC220-240V50Hz 7.2A or more
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows:
Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters.
During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
2-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
START
*: Initial setting time: approx. 2 minutes for high-end model, approx. 6 minutes for low-end model
Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.
2-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Figure 2-2
2-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-3
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-4
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad
2-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13
12
11
18
22
16
20
19
27 10
9
21
7 9
28 26
25 5
3 24
2
Figure 2-5
2-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-6
1. Outer case 8. Rear left upper pad 15. Hinge cover right
2. Rear bottom pad 9. Rear right upper pad 16. Label
3. Front bottom pad 10. Front left upper pad 17. Screw
4. Document Processor 11. Front right upper pad 18. Screw
5. Poly sheet 12. DP cable cover front
6. Original mat holder 13. DP cable cover rear
7. Original mat 14. Hinge cover left
2-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
Figure 2-7
2-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7
12 13 14 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-8
1. Outer case 6. Original mat holder 11. Front right upper pad
2. Rear bottom pad 7. Original mat 12. DP cable cover front
3. Front bottom pad 8. Rear left upper pad 13. DP cable cover rear
4. Document Processor 9. Rear right upper pad 14. Hinge cover right
5. Poly sheet 10. Front left upper pad 15. Label
2-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-9
2-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
6 19
20
16 17 18 15
14
5
21 11
21 21 13
1 12
3
21
21 2 21
Figure 2-10
2-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
22 23
15
17 18 19 20 21
12 13
16
14
24 9
24 24
11
10
1 3
24
24 2 24
Figure 2-11
2-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
7
4 5
5 4
Figure 2-12
2-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
Figure 2-13
2-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6 7
8
Figure 2-14
2-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10
5 4
3 1
Figure 2-15
2-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-16
*: Carry the paper feeder (PF-7100/7110) with two people by holding the parts as shown in the figure.
Figure 2-17
2-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 a
2 b c
Figure 2-18
2-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove thelift plate stopper from each cassette andattach it to the storage location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate in original position.
Cassette 1
Figure 2-19
Cassette 2
Figure 2-20
2-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2. Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
*: Lift up the sub tray (a) to check it does not come off.
b c
a
d e
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
2-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*: When not installing the optional paper feeder, attach the bundled right lower cover as shown below.
Procedures
1. Insert two protrusions (b) of the right lower cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2. Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
Figure 2-23
2-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
+8%
Figure 2-24
2-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the rear side of the main unit.
+8%
Figure 2-25
2-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a. Modular jack
a
+8%
Figure 1-2-1
ADSL
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack d
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC b
a c +8%
Figure 1-2-2
ISDN
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
c
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b +8%
Figure 1-2-3
2-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a. Modular jack d
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c. Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
a
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
Figure 1-2-4
2-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)Loading Paper
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Figure 2-3
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Such paper may cause a jam.
If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cas-
settes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
2-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-4
NOTE
Do not pull out multiple cassettes simultaneously.
Figure 2-5
NOTE
Lay down the paper length guide when using Legal in Cassette 1 and 12x18" in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-6
2-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
Figure 2-7
NOTE
Adjust the paper size guide when using SRA3, A3 or Leger in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-8
4. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-9
2-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (See page 2-26 )
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use, the paper
may skew or become jammed.
5. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-10
6. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
2-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
2-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
2-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-19
8. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-20
2-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-21
2. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-22
Note
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (See page 2-26 )
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
2-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
2-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-25
2. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-26
Note
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (See page 2-26 )
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
2-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
2-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-29
2-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Set up 4 color toner containers of C, M, Y, and K. The procedures are same for all colors.
The following procedure is an example for Yellow toner container.
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the perforation by hand.
Figure 2-32
2-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5~ 5~
Figure 2-33
5~ 5~
5~
Figure 2-34
CLICK!
Figure 2-35
Figure 2-36
2-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-37
2-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(14)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed. Avail-
able of setting the necessary items. Also, it can beset from System Menu as below.
>6\VWHP0HQX&RXQWHU@NH\
Figure 2-38
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for
summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you per-
form Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the
header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in
Western notation.
Value:
2-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting procedures
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System
Menu] key > [System/Network] > [Network] >
[TCP/IP Setting].
2. Select [IPv4] for setting.
3. Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.
*: The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
2-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(15)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)
Select maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [HIGH ALTITUDE] to execute the procedures below
Low-end model
Procedures
1. maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
High-end model
Procedures
1. maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
(17)Image adjustment
Execute the image adjustment in maintenance mode U952 (Maintenance mode workflow)
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select the [Execute] .
4. Select [Setup] to adjust the main unit and [EH Setup] to adjust the optional units.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the maintenance mode.
6. After transition, execute the following setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
2-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*: When not executing U952, enter the maintenance modes with the numeric keys in the following order to
execute each setting.
2-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-39
4.Press the [Start] key.
*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
5.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: Set test pattern 2 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
6.Press the [Start] key.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
8.Press the [Stop] key.
2-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-40
Figure 2-41
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more, and
then turn on the power switch.
2-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
a
b
Figure 2-42
4. Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
SW
b
a
Figure 2-43
5. Reattach the covers.
2-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 2-44
IMPORTANT
Check two gaskets (b) are affixed to the hard disk mounting plate (a) before installing it.
Figure 2-45
2-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3. Connect two connectors (a) of the cables to the hard disk (e).
4. Latch two hooks (b) on the aperture (c) and attach the hard disk (e) with four screws (d)(M3x8).
c
b b
a
d
d
d
e
d
Figure 2-46
2-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Connect two connectors (a) of the hard disk to two connectors (b) of the main PWB.
6. Fix the wire (c) with two wire saddle (d) and four wire stopper (d).
b
a
b
a
d
e
c
d
Figure 2-47
*: When an optional HDD is inserted into the main unit for the first time, it must be formatted before use.
Formatting will delete all existing data on the HDD.
2-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
Figure 2-48
3. Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4. Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) once removed.
a
a
b
Figure 2-49
2-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Procedures
1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
2. Remove a screw (b)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (c) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-50
2-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-51
6. Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7. Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
d
f
Figure 2-52
2-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-53
9. Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8).
Figure 2-54
2-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
10. Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c)(M3x10).
Figure 2-55
2-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-56
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-57
2-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-58
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-59
2-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
Figure 2-60
B B
A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-61
12. Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
a
Figure 2-62
2-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a c d
Figure 2-63
4. Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
Figure 2-64
2-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two screws
(d) (M3x8).
a
c
a d
d
Figure 2-65
6. Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) once
removed in step 2.
b a c
Figure 2-66
2-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7. Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a). (Except 120v model)
Figure 2-67
2-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull up the operation unit (a).
3. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-68
2-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-69
Figure 2-70
Type B
Thicker but smaller than its holder: Continue to step 8.
Figure 2-71
2-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Type C
Thinner and in the same size as its holder: Continue to step 11.
Figure 2-72
7. Affix two Hook-and-loop fastener to the IC card reader (a) and the holder part of the main unit (b).
8. Attach the IC card reader (a) to the main unit (b).
9. Proceed to step 17.
Figure 2-73
10. Affix two Hook-and-loop fastener to the IC card reader (a) and the holder part of the main unit (b).
*: Affix the Hook-and-loop fastener so that the IC card reader (a) is mounted on the holder with both being flush with
the right side edges.
11. Attach the IC card reader (a) to the main unit.
12. Proceed to step 17.
Figure 2-74
2-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
c
b
b
a
Figure 2-75
17. Connect the USB connector (b) to the USB interface slot (c).
18. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (e) of the main unit.
c
e b
d
a
Figure 2-76
2-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
19. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate the front right ISU cover (a) to latch hour lower hooks (e) to secure it in the
original position.
*: Align the upper eject cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-77
20. Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
Figure 2-78
21. Attach the IC card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach
the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Figure 2-79
2-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws
(a)(M3x8).
*: Align them with each other at the mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
Figure 2-80
2-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
Figure 2-81
d c
d
Figure 2-82
2-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
a
d
Figure 2-83
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-84
2-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
Figure 2-85
15. Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook (c)
to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e)(M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
Figure 2-86
2-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
16. Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b)(M4x8).
b
b
a
Figure 2-87
17. Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d) (M3x8, black).
*: Attach it while the hooks come to the punchmark B.
b c b
a
d
Figure 2-88
2-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
18. Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting plate
(c) and slide it to the rear.
19. Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
b
Figure 2-89
20. Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws
(a)(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
Figure 2-90
2-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
21. Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
Figure 2-91
22. Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a)(M3x8 Black).
b a
c
Figure 2-92
23. Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
Figure 2-93
2-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
24. Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
25. Connect the USB cable (c) with the USB connector (d) on the main unit.
d
c
a b
Figure 2-94
26. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
Figure 2-95
2-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note
In case the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the card reader from the hook (c) of the main
unit. Bundle two of the excess USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
b
Figure 2-96
27. Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
Figure 2-97
2-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
28. Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3×8).
*: Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-98
29. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach the ISU front right cover in the
original position.
Figure 2-99
2-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
30. Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws
(d)(M3×8).
31. Reattach the screw (b)(M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
d
Figure 2-100
32. Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a) (M3x8).
b
c
Figure 2-101
2-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-102
2-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-103
7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-104
2-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-105
9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
Figure 2-106
2-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
10. Remove two pins (b) and two nuts (c) from the handset mounting plate (a).
11. Secure the original tray (d) with two pins and two nuts once removed.
b
b
A
A
B
A A
a B
A
B
c
d
c
Figure 2-107
12. Put two catches (c) at the backside of the handset holder (b) into two pins (a) and slide it toward you to fix it on the
document tray (d).
B
A
b A
A
B
A B
A
B
a B
Figure 2-108
2-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Cut the separator cover (b) of the tray lower cover (a) with nippers, etc.
a
Figure 2-109
A A
B B
A A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-110
2-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
16. Affix the sheet (b) on the left side of document table (a).
a
b
A
A
B
B A
A
B
B
Figure 2-111
17. Connect the telephone wire (a) to the handset (b) and handset holder (c).
B
A
Figure 2-112
18. Connect the modular cord (a) to the handset holder (b).
Figure 2-113
2-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
19. Connect one end of the connector (b) of the modular cord (a) to the machine right side (c).
a b
c
Figure 2-114
2-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)Cassette heater
(11-1) In the case of main unit cassette
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
Figure 2-115
4. Turn over the lower cassette (a).
5. Secure the heater cover (c) included in the cassette heater set package at the bottom of the cassette with five
screws (b)(M3×8 P tight).
b
b
b
b
b
c a
Figure 2-116
2-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6. Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
7. Attach it with the screw (e) (M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
Figure 2-117
8. Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
9. Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
Figure 2-118
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-119
4. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
5. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
*: Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
Figure 2-120
2-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-121
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
Figure 2-122
5. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
6. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
7. Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
Figure 2-123
2-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-124
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
(Side Paper Feeder side)
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3. Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
Figure 2-125
a
Figure 2-126
2-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Release four bosses (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
Figure 2-127
de
a
d
e
b
f
c
Figure 2-128
2-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8. Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9. Attach two wire saddles (d) and the edge saddles (e) and secure the wire.
10. Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
e
c
a
d
Figure 2-129
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit side paper feeder (b).
a
c
Figure 2-130
2-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12. Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13. Attach to the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d)(M3×8).
d
a
Figure 2-131
14. Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit side paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire (d).
a b
Figure 2-132
15. Reattach the parts in the original position.
16. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .
2-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-133
a
b a
Figure 2-134
2-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e
a
b
c
Figure 2-135
9. Secure the vendor relay cable (b) at a cable stopper (a) which was removed.
Figure 2-136
10. Remove the screw (a) and attach the ground terminal (b) of the vendor cable.
a
a
Figure 2-137
2-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12. Connect the signal wire of the coin vendor to the connector of the vendor wire.
Figure 2-138
13. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Attach the vender base (b) to coin vender (c) with four screws (a)(M4x6).
c
b
a
Figure 2-139
3. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and slide the rear top cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-140
2-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
c
d 3
Figure 2-141
c
Figure 2-142
2-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
e
d d
b
b
Figure 2-143
2-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13. Lift up three hooks (c) and release them. Then remove the lower left cover (b).
c
b
c c c
a
a
b
a
Figure 2-144
14. Remove two screws (a) and remove the concealing lid (b).
a
b a
Figure 2-145
2-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
15. Pass the vendor wire (a) through the aperture (b).
16. Secure the vendor cable (a) with two screws (c) once removed in step 5.
a
b
c
Figure 2-146
17. Remove one screw (a) and attach to the earth terminal (b) of the vendor wire.
a
a
Figure 2-147
2-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
18. Connect the connector (b) of the vendor relay wire (a) to the connector (d) (YC21) of the engine PWB (c).
a b
d
YC1 YC29
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC6
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC39 YC23
YC33
Figure 2-148
19. Pass the vendor relay wire (a) through the wire saddle (b) and the edge saddle (c).
Figure 2-149
2-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
20. Remove four wire stoppers (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
21. Connect the connector (c) of the vendor relay wire to the vendor wire (d).
c a
Figure 2-150
22. Remove wire stopper (a) and then fix the vendor relay wire (b).
Figure 2-151
2-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
28. Connect the signal wire (b) of the coin vendor to the connector (a) of the vendor wire.
Figure 2-152
29. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U206 (Coin vendor setting: On/Off Config) to [ON].
2-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(13)Banner Tray
Procedures
1. Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the
paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
Figure 2-153
a
Figure 2-154
2-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 2-155
4. Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
b
Figure 2-156
2-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1 OCR extension kit*1
*: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*: If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Item
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
2-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7. After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
IMPORTANT
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of
FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34 com-
munication in such a line.
2-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off (See page 6-266)
U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed] (See page 6-261)
2-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view (Low-end model)
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
Figure 3-1
3-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
7 6 8
10
12
5 3
2
Figure 3-2
3-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path 2
Figure 3-3
2 3 1
Paper path
Figure 3-4
3-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-5
3-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Original path
Figure 3-6
2 1
Original path
Figure 3-7
3-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Original path
Figure 3-8
Paper path
Figure 3-9
3-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-10
3-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 2 1
Paper path
Figure 3-11
3-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 1
4
⏝⣬ᦙ㏦㊰
Figure 3-12
3-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-13
3-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 3 2
Paper path
Figure 3-14
3-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Paper path
Figure 3-15
3-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U
L
T
A
H
I
C
Figure 3-16
3-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
M
K
Q
J 66xx J
O
O O U
P
H
O
T F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 3-17
3-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
N N
N U
N
H
T
A H
I
E C
Figure 3-18
3-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-19
3-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-20
3-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-21
Figure 3-22
3-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-23
Figure 3-24
Figure 3-25
3-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-6) IH PWB
Figure 3-26
Figure 3-27
3-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
19
18
17
16
12
Drum unit Laser scanner unit 13
24 14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21 Main unit
30
Fuser unit
IH unit
27 3
10
11 29
25 7
4
20 31
Figure 3-28
3-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and eject drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger high-voltage and the developer bias.
6. Power source PWB............................... Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB BK............................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Developer PWB M ................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
18. Developer PWB C................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
19. Developer PWB Y ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
20. Drum relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for
drum units, developer units.
21. Drum PWB BK ...................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
22. Drum PWB M ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
23. Drum PWB C ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
24. Drum PWB Y......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
25. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
26. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling the fuser IH.
27. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
28. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
29. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
30. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX
PWB.
31. Fuser high-voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser belt.
3-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
31 Fuser high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER 302ND9469_
SP
3-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Developer unit 26 25 24 23
Primary transfer unit
31
41
Drum unit Laser scanner unit
30 29 15 28 27 14
Fuser unit
IH unit
34
46
47
48
55
Main unit
53
45
59
60 11
33 44 43 49 52
51 32
58 50
35 62 40 16
7 9
54 4
64 21
17 56
38
65 1
8 3
42 12
61
Figure 3-29
3-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
53. Job separator sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
54. Front cover switch................................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the front cover is
opened and reset.
55. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
56. PF setting switch................................... Detecting the paper feeder.
57. Main switch ........................................... AC power shutdown.
58. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
59. Conveying open/close switch................ Detecting the conveying section open/close.
60. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
61. Right cover switch................................. Detecting the right cover open/close.
62. Temperature/humidity sensor (outside machine)Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main
unit.
63. MP position switch ................................ Detecting the MP bottom plate position
64. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
65. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
3-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
36 Retard sensor 1 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY 302ND9432_
SP
37 Retard sensor 2 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY 302ND9432_
SP
38 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
39 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
40 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
41 LSU thermistor LK-8350 302L79311_
42 Weight detection sensor - -
43 Fuser jam sensor FK-8350 302L79306_
44 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8350 302L79306_
45 IH position sensor FK-8585IH 302L79307_
FK-8580IH 302L79308_
46 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8350 302L79306_
47 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8350 302L79306_
48 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8350 302L79306_
49 Fuser thermistor 4?(press) FK-8350 302L79306_
50 Eject reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
51 Lower eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
52 Upper eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
53 Job separator sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
54 Front cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
55 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
56 PF setting switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
57 Main power switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
58 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
59 Conveying open/close switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
60 Waste toner full sensor DR-8350 302L79312_
61 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
62 Temperature/humidity sensor (out- PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
side machine)
63 MP position switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
64 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
65 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
3-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
(3-5) Motors
22 21
Developer unit 23 Primary transfer unit
24
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit 29
IH unit Main unit 47
1
2
48 42
14 25
40 46 31
39 6
28 26
27 18
38 13
43 41
44 17
45
35 34 33 32 37 7 30 20 16 15 36
Figure 3-30
3-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
3-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
32 Developer fan motor BK FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
33 Developer fan motor M FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
34 Developer fan motor C FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
35 Developer fan motor Y FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
36 Fuser edge fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY 302ND9458_
SP
37 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
38 Front eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
39 Middle eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
40 Rear eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
41 Container fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
42 Eject fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
43 Vibration motor BK PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
44 Vibration motor M PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
45 Vibration motor C PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
46 Vibration motor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER L UNIT SP 302L79407_
47 Rear eject motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
48 Container cooling fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) Others
Developer unit Primary transfer unit
Drum unit 22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10
Figure 3-31
3-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-32
3-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-33
3-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
3-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-36
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
3-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-6) IH PWB
Figure 3-39
Figure 3-40
3-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
19
18
17
16
12
Drum unit Laser scanner unit 13
24 14 28 15 1
23 26
22 8 2
21 Main unit
30
Fuser unit
IH unit
27 3
10
11 29
25 7
4
20 31
Figure 3-41
3-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and eject drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger high-voltage and the developer bias.
6. Power source PWB............................... Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB BK............................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Developer PWB M ................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
18. Developer PWB C................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
19. Developer PWB Y ................................. Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
20. Drum relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for
drum units, developer units.
21. Drum PWB BK ...................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
22. Drum PWB M ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
23. Drum PWB C ........................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
24. Drum PWB Y......................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
25. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
26. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling the fuser IH.
27. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
28. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
29. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
30. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX
PWB.
31. Fuser high-voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser belt.
3-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Developer unit 26 25 24 23
Primary transfer unit
31
41
Drum unit Laser scanner unit
30 29 15 28 27 14
Fuser unit
IH unit
34
46
47
48
55
Main unit
53
45
59
60 11
33 44 43 49 52
51 32
58 50
35 62 40 16
7 9
54 4
64 21
17 56
38
65 1
8 3
42 12
61
Figure 3-42
3-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
53. Job separator sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
54. Front cover switch................................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the front cover is
opened and reset.
55. Original size timing sensor.................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
56. Conveying open/close switch................ Detecting the paper feeder.
57. Main power switch ................................ AC power shutdown.
58. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
59. Conveying open/close switch................ Detecting the conveying section open/close.
60. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
61. Right cover switch................................. Detecting the right cover open/close.
62. Temperature/humidity sensor (outside machine)Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main
unit.
63. MP position switch ................................ Detecting the MP bottom plate position
64. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
65. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.
3-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
36 Retard sensor 1 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY 302ND9432_
SP
37 Retard sensor 2 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY 302ND9432_
SP
38 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
39 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
40 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 303NW9404_
41 LSU thermistor LK-8550 302ND9313_
42 Weight detection sensor - -
43 Fuser jam sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
44 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8550 302ND9308_
45 IH position sensor FK-8595IH 302ND9309_
FK-8590IH 302ND9310_
46 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8550 302ND9308_
47 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8550 302ND9308_
48 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8550 302ND9308_
49 Fuser thermistor 4?(press) FK-8550 302ND9308_
50 Eject reversing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
51 Lower eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
52 Upper eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
53 Job separator sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
54 Front cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
55 Original size timing sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
56 PF setting switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
57 Main power switch SW.SEESAW 7SC020403+++H01
58 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY 302NG0110_
59 Conveying open/close switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
60 Waste toner full sensor DR-8550 302ND9314_
61 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
62 Temperature/humidity sensor (out- PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
side machine)
63 MP position switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
64 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
65 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
3-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-5) Motors
22 21
Developer unit 23 Primary transfer unit
24
3
11 12
10 8
9 19
Fuser unit 29
IH unit Main unit 47
1
2
48 42
14 25
40 46 31
39 6
28 26
27 18
38 13
43 41
44 17
45
35 34 33 32 37 7 30 20 16 15 36
Figure 3-43
3-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
30 Toner sucking fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302K99436_
31 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING 302FZ4404_
32 Developer fan motor BK FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
33 Developer fan motor M FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
34 Developer fan motor C FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
35 Developer fan motor Y FAN IMAGE 302FZ4401_
36 Fuser edge fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY 302ND9458_
SP
37 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302K09430_
38 Front eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
39 Middle eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
40 Rear eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP 302ND9459_
41 Container fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP 302ND9460_
42 Eject fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 302GR4408_
43 Vibration motor BK PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
44 Vibration motor M PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
45 Vibration motor C PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
46 Vibration motor Y PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP 302ND9419_
47 Rear eject motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP 302ND9449_
48 Container cooling fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP 302LC9438_
3-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) Others
Developer unit Primary transfer unit
Drum unit 22 21 20 19
Laser scanner unit
18,25 15 16 24 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 14 7
13
12 9
11 1
29
28 2
27 3
26
10
Figure 3-44
3-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
Figure 3-45
1. DP main PWB ....................................... Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electric
parts.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7. DP paper feed sensor ........................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP eject sensor..................................... Detecting the document processor eject paper.
12. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
13. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
3-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
14. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
15. DP lift motor .......................................... Driving the document processor original bottom plate.
16. DP feed motor....................................... Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
17. DP conveying motor.............................. Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
18. DP feedshift motor ................................ Driving the original feedshift section in the document processor.
19. DP reversing motor ............................... Driving the original reversing section in the document processor.
3-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
1. DP main PWB ....................................... Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electric
parts.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7. DP paper feed sensor ........................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Front page)
9. DP backside timing sensor ................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Back page)
10. DP eject sensor..................................... Detecting the document processor eject paper.
11. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
12. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
13. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
14. DPSHD PWB ........................................ Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15. DPCIS ................................................... Scanning the backside original data in the document processor.
16. DP lift motor .......................................... Driving the document processor original bottom plate.
3-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
17. DP feed motor....................................... Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
18. DP registration motor ............................ Driving the original registration section in the document proces-
sor.
19. DP conveying motor.............................. Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
20. DP eject motor ...................................... Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
21. DP drive fan motor ................................ Cooling the document processor drive section.
22. DPCIS fan motor................................... Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document pro-
cessor (DP-7120)
3-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2 11
12
13
14
9
7 4 1
8 10
15 5
3
6
Figure 3-46
1. DP main PWB ....................................... Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electric
parts.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7. DP paper feed sensor ........................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP feed motor....................................... Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
12. DP feedshift motor ................................ Driving the original feedshift section in the document processor.
13. DP paper feed clutch ............................ Controlling drive of the original primary feed section in the docu-
ment processor.
14. DP registration clutch............................ Controlling drive of the original registration roller in the document
processor.
15. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
16. DP cooling fan motor ............................ Cooling the document processor drive section.
3-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
28
Figure 3-47
3-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
22. PF paper feed clutch 1.......................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the upper cassette.
23. PF paper feed clutch 2.......................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the lower cassette.
24. PF conveying clutch 1........................... Controlling the paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
25. PF conveying clutch 2........................... Controlling the paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26. PF cassette switch 1 ............................. Detecting presence of the upper cassette.
27. PF cassette switch 2 ............................. Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
28. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.
3-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8
10 24 17 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
Figure 3-48
3-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
21. PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 .......... Controlling the right horizontal paper conveying.
22. PF vertical conveying clutch ................. Controlling the vertical paper conveying.
23. PF cassette switch 1 ............................. Detecting presence of the right cassette.
24. PF cassette switch 2 ............................. Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
25. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.
3-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
13 9
2
11
5
10 8
1
7
12
3
6
4
14
Figure 3-49
3-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Machine front side / Machine inside / Machine rear side
Figure 3-50
3-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
1 5
2 3
Figure 3-51
3-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25
3 40 13 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
Figure 3-52
3-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
Figure 3-53
3-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
Figure 3-54
3-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
Figure 3-55
1. Punch main PWB.................................. Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
2. Punch home position sensor................. Detecting the punch cam home position.
3. Punch pulse sensor .............................. Controlling the punch cam rotation.
4. Punch slide sensor................................ Detecting the punch unit home position.
5. Punch dust tank full sensor................... Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. Punch paper edge sensor 1.................. Detecting the paper edge.
7. Punch paper edge sensor 2.................. Detecting the paper edge.
8. Punch dust tank switch ......................... Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
9. Punch motor.......................................... Driving the punch unit.
10. Punch slide motor ................................. Driving the punch unit.
11. Punch solenoid ..................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)
3-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
Figure 3-56
1. BF main PWB ....................................... Controlling the electric parts of the folding unit.
2. BF tray switch ....................................... Detecting the folding tray open/close.
3. BF left cover switch ............................... Detecting the BF left cover open/close.
4. BF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5. BF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper on the BF bridge section.
6. BF paper sensor ................................... Detecting paper on the folding bridge section.
7. BF adjusting sensor 1 ........................... Detecting lower BF moving plate home position.
8. BF adjusting sensor 2 ........................... Detecting upper BF moving plate home position.
9. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting BF side registration guide home position.
10. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting BF side registration guide home position.
11. BF blade sensor.................................... Detecting BF blade home position.
12. BF eject sensor ..................................... Detecting paper ejected to the folding tray.
13. BF tray full sensor ................................. Detecting folding tray paper full.
14. BF switch .............................................. Detecting the folding unit.
15. BF main motor ...................................... Driving the folding conveying.
16. BF paper entry motor ............................ Driving the entry roller.
17. BF blade motor ..................................... Driving the BF blade.
18. BF adjusting motor 1............................. Driving lower folding adjustor plate.
19. BF adjusting motor 2............................. Driving upper folding adjustor plate.
20. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting the lower BF side registration guide home position.
21. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting the upper BF side registration guide home position.
22. BF staple motor..................................... Driving the BF staple.
23. BF feedshift solenoid ............................ Operates the BF feedshift guide.
3-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-57
1. JS eject paper sensor ........................... Detecting presence of the job tray paper.
3-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Feed/conveying drive
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Middle clutch
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
Figure 3-58
3-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
MP drive
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
Figure 3-59
3-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Drum drive
Drum motor BK
Drum (Black)
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum (Magenta)
Drum (Cyan)
Drum (Yellow)
Figure 3-60
3-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Developer roller (Yellow)
⌧ീ࣮ࣔࢱ࣮YC
Developer motor COL
Developer clutch
Figure 3-61
3-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
⌧ീࣂࢫ
Sleeve roller (Yellow)
Developer motor CY
Developer motor M
Developer clutch
Figure 3-62
3-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-63
3-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Fuser motor
Press roller
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
Figure 3-64
3-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Fuser motor
Press roller
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU registration roller
IH core motor
Figure 3-65
3-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
11
10
12 9
7 8
5 6
1
13 14 15 16
Figure 3-66
Feed drive unit 7. Developer BK / Belt motor Toner supply drive unit
1. Paper feed motor 8. Developer motor COL 13. Toner motor (BK)
2. Paper feed clutch 1 9. Belt isolation motor 14. Toner motor (M)
3. Vertical conveying clutch 10. Container motor 15. Toner motor (C)
4. Paper feed clutch 2 16. Toner motor (Y)
Fuser drive unit
Main drive unit 11. Fuser motor
5. Drum motor BK 12. Fuser isolation motor
6. Drum motor COL
3-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
12
11
13 10
7 9
8
5 6
1
14 15 16 17
Figure 3-67
3-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-68
Low-end model
High-end model
Figure 3-69
3-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-70
Figure 3-71
3-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Paper feed roller 8 7 62 3 1 4
2. Pickup roller
3. Pickup holder
4. Retard roller
5. Retard holder 13
6. Friction pad
7. Cassette bottom plate 12 5 1
8. Paper width guides 23
6
9. Paper length guide 8 14
10. Cassette base 7
11. Width guide release lever 4
12. Actuator
(paper sensor)
13. Vertical conveying roller 12
5
14. Vertical conveying pulley
Figure 3-72
3-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
Figure 3-73
3-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
Figure 3-74
3-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 3 1 6 9 5
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP Retard roller
3. MP Retard guide
4. MP Retard holder
5. MP bottom plate
6. MP bottom pad
7. MP tray
8. MP frame
9. MP paper width guides
10. Paper stopper
11. Actuator
(MP paper sensor )
12. Sub tray
13. Actuator
(MP paper length sensor) 2 11
Figure 3-75
11
9
1
3
5 8
12
2 6 13
9 3
Figure 3-76
3-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP clutch YC7-A5
Figure 3-77
3-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Middle roller 5
2. Middle pulley 4
3. Registration guide sheet 3
6
4. Registration roller left
5. Registration roller right 7
6. Registration guide
7. Conveying frame
2
1
Figure 3-78
2
1
6
3
Figure 3-79
3-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Figure 3-80
3-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 5 9 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
Figure 3-81
[Components parts]
1. CCD 9. Exposure lamp
2. Scanner frame 10. Drive motor
3. Contact glass 11. Scanner wire
4. Original size indicator 12. Scanner wire drum
5. Slit glass 13. Original size sensor
6. ISU lens 14. Home position sensor
7. Mirror A 15. Mirror unit A
8. Mirror B 16. Mirror unit B
3-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5
4 14
9
7
3
13
10
11 6
1
2
12
Figure 3-82
[Block diagram]
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-83
3-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2. fθ lens A
3. fθ lens B
4. LSU glass 6 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4 3 7 4
5. LSU base
6. Mirror
7. Laser emitting diode
8. Collimator lens
9. LD slit glass plate
10. LD mirror
11. Cylindrical lens
12. PD PWB 5 1 2 7 7 7 3 7
13. PD lens
14. PD mirror
Figure 3-84
(Low-end model)
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
Figure 3-85
3-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC27
YC1 YC3
LSU thermistor YC7-1
PD PWB YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-86
(High-end model)
7
5 8
9
12
11 13 14
4 10
1
2
6
3
6
Figure 3-87
3-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
YC9 YC10 YC27
PD PWB YC4
YC6-1
LSU cleaning motor
YC6-3
YC5-3
Polygon motor YC5-4
YC5-5
APC PWB
Figure 3-88
3-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(Low-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Developer roller
2. Developer blade
5 1 7(Y) 5 1 7(C) 5 1 7(M) 5 1 7(B)
3. Developer screw A
4. Developer screw B
5. Developer case
6. Toner sensor 4
6
7. Drum
3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2 4 6 3 2
Figure 3-89
4 6
3
Figure 3-90
3-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor COL
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer BK / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Image PWB
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor BK
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Developer PWB BK YC2
T/C sensor C
T/C sensor Y
Figure 3-91
3-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Sleeve roller (Y) (C) (M) %
2. Magnet roller
3. Developer blade 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 1
4. Developer screw A
5. Developer screw B
6. Developer case
7. Toner sensor
5 7 4 3 57 4 3 5 7 4 3 5 7 4 3
Figure 3-92
5 7
4
Figure 3-93
3-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias
Main high-voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC37-1
YC37-2
Developer motor YC
YC37-3
YC37-4
YC24-20
YC24-21
Developer motor M
YC24-22
YC24-23
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer BK / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
T/C sensor BK
ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Vibration motor Drum relay PWB
Developer
⌧ീᇶᯈBKPWB BK YC2
T/C sensor M
Vibration motor
T/C sensor C
Vibration motor
T/C sensor Y
Vibration motor
Figure 3-94
3-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected
to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The cleaning lamp consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.
(Low-end model)
[Components parts] 3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (B)
1. Charger roller 567 567 567 567
2. Charger cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Drum screw
7. Cleaning lamp
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Figure 3-95
(High-end model)
[Components parts] 3 (Y) 3 (C) 3(M) 3 (B)
1. Charger roller 569 569 569 569
2. Charger cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Cleaning roller
7. Toner conveying roller
8. Drum screw
9. Cleaning lamp
1 2 87 1 2 87 1 2 37
8 1 2 37
8
Figure 3-96
3-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3 9
2
1
5
8
7
6
Figure 3-97
3-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
YC24-7
YC24-8
Drum motor COL
YC24-9
YC24-10
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor BK
YC24-3
YC24-4
Feed image PWB
⌧ീᇶᯈBK
Drum PWB BK YC10
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
Drum heater YC6
Cleaning lamp M
Cleaning lamp C
Cleaning lamp Y
Figure 3-98
3-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Drive roller
2. Backup roller 8 7 6 3 3 3 5 3 1
3. Primary transfer roller
4. Tension roller
5. Transfer belt
6. Belt pre-brush
7. Cleaning fur brush
8. Cleaning roller
9. Cleaning screw
10. Cleaning blade 10 9 4 2 12 12 12 12
11. Transfer unit cover (Y) (C) (M) (B)
12. Drum
Figure 3-99
2 3
9
8
4
7
10
1
11
Figure 3-100
3-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC34
Transfer high-voltage
Transfer bias
PWB
Engine PWB
YC23-1
Belt isolation motor
YC23-2
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer BK / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Figure 3-101
3-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Secondary transfer roller
2
2. Separation brush
3. Transfer front guide
4. Transfer spring
3 1 4
Figure 3-102
3 4
Figure 3-103
3-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Figure 3-104
3-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-105
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
Figure 3-106
3-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC2-1 YC10-2
Fuser motor
YC3-1 YC10-3
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high-voltage Fuser isolation motor
YC10-8
PWB
FSR-1 Drive PWB
Fuser thermostat
Image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
Figure 3-107
3-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
[Components parts]
1. Fuser belt 9 8
2. IH core
3. Fuser thermistor 7
4. Separator 6
5. Press roller 2 4
6. Press roller separation claw 3
7. Actuator 5
(Eject sensor) 11
8. Fuser eject roller
9. Left fuser eject roller 13
10. Pressure switching cam
12
11. Fuser frame
12. Fuser front guide
13. Discharger needle
1
Figure 3-108
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
Figure 3-109
3-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high-voltage Fuser isolation motor
YC10-8
PWB
Drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Image PWB
YC22
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
Figure 3-110
3-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-111
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
Figure 3-112
3-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
(Low-end model)
YC17-B9
Rear eject motor YC17-B10
YC17-B11
YC17-B12
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Eject reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
YC17-1A5
Upper eject solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower eject solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-113
3-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(High-end model)
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Eject reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
YC17-1A5
Upper eject solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower eject solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-114
3-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-115
Figure 3-116
Figure 3-117
3-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DU conveying upper roller 1
2. DU conveying upper pulley 9
3. DU conveying middle roller 2
4. DU conveying middle pulley 12
5. DU conveying lower roller 3
6. DU conveying lower pulley 4
7. DU registration roller
8. DU registration pulley
9. Actuator
Duplex sensor 1 6
10. Actuator 5
Duplex sensor 2
4
11. DU conveying base 11
12. DU conveying guide
10
7
8
Figure 3-118
1
9
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
Figure 3-119
3-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Figure 3-120
3-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
14 3 4
2 1 13
9 10 8 7
15
5
27
28
30
16
19
20
17
24 25 23 22 29 18
Figure 3-121
[Components parts]
1. PF paper feed roller 1 16. PF paper feed roller 2
2. PF Pickup roller 1 17. PF pickup roller 2
3. PF Pickup holder 1 18. PF pickup holder 2
4. PF retard roller 1 19. PF retard roller 2
5. PF retard holder 1 20. PF retard holder 2
6. PF friction pad 1 21. PF friction pad 2
7. PF cassette bottom plate 1 22. PF cassette bottom plate 2
8. PF paper width guides 1 23. PF paper width guides 2
9. Paper length guide 1 24. PF paper length guide 2
10. PF cassette base 1 25. PF cassette base 2
11. PF width guide release lever 1 26. PF width guide release lever 2
12. PF conveying roller 1 27. PF conveying roller 2
13. PF conveying pulley 1 28. PF conveying pulley 2
14. PF actuator 1 29. PF actuator 2
(PF paper sensor 1) (PF paper sensor 2)
15. PF actuator 1 30. PF actuator 2
(PF paper conveying sensor 1) (PF paper conveying sensor 2)
3-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
Figure 3-122
22
23 21
28
16
26
27
18
22 15
20
25
Figure 3-123
3-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
PF main PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length switch 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
YC5-11
PF paper length switch 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
Figure 3-124
3-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
1 1 10
[Components parts]
9 8 7 2 4 13 2 4 11
1. PF paper feed roller
2. PF pickup roller
3. PF pickup holder
4. PF retard roller
5. PF retard holder
6. PF friction pad 12 3
7. PF deck bottom plate 5 12 3 14
8. PF paper width guides 5
9. Paper length guide*1
10. PF conveying roller
11. PF conveying pulley
12. PF actuator
(PF paper sensor)
13. PF actuator
(PF horizontal conveying sensor)
Figure 3-125
14. PF actuator
(PF vertical conveying sensor)
*1: inch specification only
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
8
9 11 1
2
8 12
8
10
4
6
7
Figure 3-126
3-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF main PWB
Figure 3-127
3-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
1. PF paper feed roller
2. PF pickup roller
3. PF pickup holder 10
4. PF retard roller
4
5. PF friction pad
6. PF cassette bottom plate
7. PF paper width guides 11
8. Paper length guide 5
9. PF conveying roller
10. PF conveying pulley
11. PF actuator
(PF paper sensor)
Figure 3-128
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
Figure 3-129
3-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF main PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
Figure 3-130
3-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP forwarding pulley
2. DP paper feed belt
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
3. DP feed holder
4. DF separation pulley 10 4 1 8
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original sensor
7. DP original width guide
8. DP original tray
9. DP paper feed sensor
10. DP registration roller
11. DP registration pulley
12. DP actuator
(DP registration sensor ) 9 6
13. DP actuator
(DP original length sensor )
Figure 3-131
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
5
8
9 12
Figure 3-132
3-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-2) Original conveying section and Original switchback and eject section
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the
optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
The original switchback and eject section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is
ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller. When scanning the original in the duplex switchback
mode, the original is conveyed to the switchback tray once and then reconveyed to the original conveying
section by the switchback roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 6 8 9
3. DP scanner guide
4. DP scanner guide pulley
5. DP conveying roller 2
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley 14
10. DP feedshift roller
11. DP feedshift pulley
12. DP eject roller
13. DP eject pulley
14. DP eject tray
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
15. DP actuator
(DP Eject sensor)
Figure 3-133
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
Figure 3-134
3-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP eject sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
Figure 3-135
3-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
Figure 3-136
3-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP forwarding pulley
2. DP paper feed belt
11 10 2
3. DP belt tension pulley
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
4. DF separation pulley
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original width guide
7. DP original bottom plate
8. DP paper feed sensor
9. DP registration roller
10. DP registration pulley
11. DP conveying roller 1
12. DP conveying pulley 1
13. DP original tray
14. DP original length sensor 4 5
Figure 3-137
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
Figure 3-138
3-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP backside timing sensor 32 1
2. DPCIS
3. DPCIS roller
4. DP conveying roller 2
5. DP conveying pulley 2
6. DP scanner guide pulley
7. DP scanner guide
8. DP conveying roller 3
9. DP conveying pulley 3 13
10. DP actuator
(DP eject sensor)
11. DP eject roller
12. DP eject pulley
13. DP eject tray
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
Figure 3-139
2
3
6 5
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
Figure 3-140
3-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
DPSHD PWB
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP eject motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
Figure 3-141
3-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. DP forwarding pulley
2. DP feed roller
3. DP feed holder 12 11 2 8 7
4. DF separation pulley 13 14 4 5 3 1 9 10 15
5. DP front separation pad
6. DF friction pad
7. DP actuator
(DP original sensor)
8. DP original stopper
9. DP original width guide
10. DP original tray
11. DP actuator
(DP paper feed sensor)
12. DP registration roller
13. DP registration pulley
14. DP actuator
(DP registration sensor )
15. DP actuator
(DP original length sensor )
Figure 3-142
3-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11
2
14 9
13
12 7
4
5
1
8 6
9 10
15
Figure 3-143
3-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(6-2) Original conveying section and Original switchback and eject section
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the
optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
The original switchback and eject section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is
ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller. When scanning the original in the duplex switchback
mode, the original is conveyed to the switchback tray once and then reconveyed to the original conveying
section by the switchback roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 12
3. Actuator
(DP timing sensor)
4. DP scanner guide
5. DP conveying roller 2
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide 13
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley
10. DP eject roller
11. DP eject pulley 1 5 7 8 11
12. DP reversing guide 2 4 6 9 10
13. DP eject tray
Figure 3-144
7
5
6
3
7
2 1
12
11
8 10
9 13
Figure 3-145
3-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor
YC9-3
YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
DP feedshift motor
YC9-7
YC9-8
DP main PWB
YC4-1
DP original width sensor YC4-2
YC4-4
Figure 3-146
3-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
2
The second side of original is 3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is 1
conveyed to the DP switchback tray.
DP switchback tray
Figure 3-147
3-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF conveying roller 13
4. DF conveying pulley
5. DF entry sensor 14
6. DF paper stopper
7. DF Middle roller 2
8. DF Middle pulley
1
9. DF paddle
10. DF upper guide
11. DF paper width guides
12. DF bundle eject unit
13. DF eject roller 15 17 6 16
14. DF eject pulley
15. DF actuator
(Paper press sensor)
16. DF stapler
17. DF middle tray
18. DF tray
Figure 3-148
18 13
8
7
14
4
9
2 1
16
Figure 3-149
3-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF eject motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC13-2
DF Paper pressing solenoid
YC13-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF Eject release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF main PWB
Figure 3-150
3-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-151
a
2. The DF bundle eject unit (b) descends
and The DF upper guide (c) descends d b
when the paper trailing edge passes the
DF middle roller (a). Then, the DF eject
c
roller (d) is rotated reversely and paper
is sent to the DF middle tray (e).
Figure 3-152
e
Figure 3-153
3-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-154
a
5. The DF bundle eject unit (b) descends
and The DF upper guide (c) descends d b
when the paper trailing edge passes the
DF middle roller (a). Then, by rotating c
the DF eject roller (d) and the DF pad- e
dles (e) , paper is conveyed to the DF
middle tray (f). Paper is adjusted as well
f
as the 1st sheet.
Figure 3-155
Figure 3-156
3-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts] 7 9 8
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley 6
3. DF feedshift solenoid 3
4. DF tray B conveying roller 11
5. DF conveying pulley
6. DF tray B eject roller
7. DF eject pulley 10
8. DF sub eject sensor 4
5
9. DF actuator
(DF sub eject sensor) 2
3
10. DF entry sensor
11. DF tray B 1
Figure 3-157
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 3-158
3-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF eject motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
DF paper entry motor
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF main PWB
Figure 3-159
3-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
e
d
b
Figure 3-160
3-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-161
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
Figure 3-162
3-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF Shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
DF eject release motor
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
DF feedshift solenoid 1
YC18-7
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
DF feedshift solenoid 2
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4
DF stapler unit
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC15-11 / YC15-12
Figure 3-163
3-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
When finishing multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to
finish paper, the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
b
c
Figure 3-164
Figure 3-165
3-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-166
3-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
e
d
b i
j
Figure 3-167
3-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
h
Figure 3-168
3-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9 10 12 8 6 7 5 4 2 1 15 3
[Components parts]
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF entry sensor
4. DF middle sensor
5. DF actuator
(DF middle sensor)
6. DF Middle roller 11
7. DF Middle pulley
13,14
8. DF bundle eject unit
9. DF eject roller
10. DF eject pulley
11. DF eject sensor
12. DF adjusting tray
16
13. DF side registration sensor 1
14. DF side registration sensor 2
15. DF staple unit
16. DF slide sensor
17. DF paddle
18. DF eject tray
Figure 3-169
3-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
18
6
7
18
10
9
1
2
Figure 3-170
3-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF eject release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF paper entry motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF eject motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF main PWB
DF stapler reley PWB YC10
DF stapler unit
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
Figure 3-171
3-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
a
c
e
f
h g
j
i k
Figure 3-172
3-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
d
k
j
Figure 3-173
3-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(10)Mailbox (MT-5100)
The mailbox ejects paper to the tray 1 to 7 designated to stack
[Components parts] 9
1. MB conveying pulley
2. MB conveying roller 10
3. MB eject pulley
4. MB eject roller
11
5. MB lower entry guide 3
6. MB middle entry guide 4
7. MB upper entry guide 12
8. MB feedshift nail 3 7
4
9. MB tray 1 13
10. MB tray 2 3 8
11. MB tray 3
4
14 2 1
12. MB tray 4 3 8
13. MB tray 5 4
14. MB tray 6 15
15. MB tray 7 3 8
4
16. MB Actuator 2 1
(MB overflow sensor) 3 8
4
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
Figure 3-174
3-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9
10
11
7
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
Figure 3-175
3-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
MB main PWB
YC5-1
MB conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
YC3
YC7
DF main PWB
Figure 3-176
3-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b d
a e
Figure 3-177
3-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
1. Punch cam
2. Punch cutter 1
3. Punch dust tank
6
4. Punch cutter holder
5. Punch cam shaft 7
6. Punch home position sensor 2
7. Punch pulse sensor
8. Punch pulse plate
Figure 3-178
8
4
1
5
2
Figure 3-179
3-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC4-1
Punch motor
YC4-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
Punch slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
YC5-4
YC5-5
Punch paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
YC5-2
Punch solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF main PWB
Figure 3-180
3-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Components parts]
2 1
1. 1.BF conveying roller 1
3
2. 2.BF conveying pulley 1
3. 3.BF vertical conveying sen-
sor
4. 4.BF conveying roller 2
21 17 16
5. 5.BF conveying pulley 2
22 19 18 14 15
6. 6.BF entry roller
5 4
7. 7.BF entry pulley
8. 8.BF entry sensor 8
6 7
9. 9.BF paper sensor
25
10. 10.BF blade
11. 11.BF blade sensor 26 20
12. 12.BF right roller 23
13. 13.BF left roller
9
14. 14.BF upper roller
15. 15.BF staple unit
16. 16.BF eject sensor
17. 17.BF conveying roller 3
18. 18.BF conveying pulley 3
19. 19.BF feedshift guide
20. 20.BF eject roller 24 13 1211 10
21. 21.BF eject pulley
Figure 3-181
22. 22.BF tray full sensor
23. 23.BF eject paper press arm
24. 24.BF lower moving plate
25. 25.BF upper moving plate
26. 26.BF tray
1
2
18
21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 7
Figure 3-182
3-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[Block diagram]
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration sensor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF main PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
BF side registration sensor 1
YC10-19/ YC10-20
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF main PWB
Figure 3-183
3-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e a d
f c
c f
Figure 3-184
3. The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by the BF blade motor drive to pinch it between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4. Center-folded paper I ejected to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF eject
roller (d).
c b
d a
Figure 3-185
3-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Tri-folding
1. The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor
1/2 as well as the center-folding operation.
2. After the paper side registration, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and have it pinched between the
BF right roller (b) and BF left roller (c).
3. The BF feed-shift solenoid (d) activates the BF feed-shift guide (e) it switches the paper conveying path
for the paper from the BF right/left roller to convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
Figure 3-186
4. When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated at the space is pinched between the
BF right roller (a) and upper BF roller (b). Then, the paper is folded inside.
3-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 3-187
5. Tri-folded paper (a) is ejected to the BF tray (d) by the BF conveying roller (b) and BF eject roller (c).
c b
a
Figure 3-188
3-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
A B C
B
*: If this finishing is executed for the paper Z
bundle, there may be little margin for
the tri-folding position and Z section
may be folded.
A C
*: Machine shipment setting (B)
Metric (A4) : 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter) : 95 to 96 mm
Figure 3-189
3-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
a
Figure 3-190
b
c
Figure 3-191
3-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e
d
Figure 3-192
Treatment 2 B
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting:
Three Fold] to shift the tri-folding position (a)
and to change the width A and C. (Width of B
A C A C
remains unchanged.)
ᕥ ྑ
Raise the set value to align the tri-folding to the
left.
Lower the set value to align the tri-folding to
the right.
a a
Figure 3-193
3-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the
power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the
disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to
damage the PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
*: Due to the structure of the 30 ppm model, the operation panel is lit for a moment when the power code is
plugged in.
4-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
A black-colored band when seen through the the anti-counterfeit film portion left side window ( mark).
A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the anti-counterfeit film portion right side window
( mark).
When seen as the above, it is genuine. Otherwise (e.g. both seen in gold), it is a counterfeit.
See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)
Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal
Figure 4-1
The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.
Incision
Cut
Figure 4-2
4-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
120V/220-240V
4-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-2)High-end Model
100V
4-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
120V/220-240V
4-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Low-end model
High-end Model
4-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Developer unit
4-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
4-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-3
d
e
c
a
b
c
4-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
4-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-7
c b
Figure 4-8
IMPORTANT
*: After replacing with the new pickup roller
and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a)
to the position where it is aligned to the
triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-9
4-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Figure 4-10
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller sur-
face.
c b
Figure 4-11
4-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
4-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-14
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push A part
so that the lever (b) is at the same level of the
covers at the both sides
Figure 4-15
4-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-16
4-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
4-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-19
4-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP separation pulley
or MP paper feed roller, take care not to touch
the roller surface.
Figure 4-20
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP paper feed roller.
Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
4-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
Take care not to hit the primary transfer belt to
the inner cover (d) and front cover for mainte-
nance (c).
d
c
Figure 4-23
b
a
b
Figure 4-24
4-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
Figure 4-25
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
1. Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
2. ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto
4. Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)
4-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
b
c
a
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
4-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
b
c
Figure 4-28
Figure 4-29
4-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-30
Figure 4-31
4-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-32
IMPORTANT
In case of closing the inner cover(a), push A
part till lever (b) becomes the same aspects
with both side of covers.
Figure 4-33
4-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-34
5. Push up the lock lever (a) and remove 40/50/60 ppm 25/32 ppm
four drum units (b) (Y,C,M,K).
6. Attach the new drum units.
7. Reattach the parts in the original posi-
tion.
a b b b
b
Figure 4-35
4-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the a
developer unit when installing the drum unit
while the developer unit is installed. Otherwise,
it causes the drum damage.
Figure 4-36
4-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-37
IMPORTANT
1. Install the main charge roller unit (a) in
the drum unit (c) while releasing the b
main charger roller release lever (b).
2. Insert the main charger release lever
(b) into the aperture and press down A
part to check it clicks to lock.
a
Figure 4-38
4-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-39
Execute the following setting after replacing the main charge roller.
1. Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear
2. Developer bias adjustment (maintenance mode U140): AC Calibration
3. ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
4. Color registration adjustment (maintenance mode U469): Auto
5. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end model only)
6. Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)
4-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-40
Figure 4-41
4-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-42
Figure 4-43
4-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-44
4-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-45
IMPORTANT
1. When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-46
4-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-47
4-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-48
b b
a a
Figure 4-49
4-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
c
b
Figure 4-50
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
1. Back side lock failure
This will cause the C6600 fuser belt rotation failure without drive at the rear side.
2. Front side lock failure
This will cause the image squareness failure due to skew feed.
4-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(6-2)Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)
Procedures
1. Compare the trailing edge of the output image with the original to check the correct image length side
(machine front side or machine rear side).
[Origin
nal]
P
Printing direc
ction
Output image
[O e A] [O
Output imagee B]
(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
Figure 4-51
Figure 4-52
4-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
b a a b
Figure 4-53
4. Loosen 2 screws (f) fixing the fuser positioning guide at the inner front frame.
5. Lift the fuser positioning guide (g), and relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h) horizontally.
Note: [Shift amount reference] (Adjust based on the side with the correct image length)
• When the image front side is short (Output image A), relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h)
toward the machine left side and lower the fuser positioning guide (g) by one step.
Therefore, the image rear side is reduced by about 0.4mm.
• When the image rear side is short (Output image B), relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h) toward
the machine right side and lift the fuser positioning guide (g) by one step.
Therefore, the image rear side is extended by about 0.4mm.
f
Machine left side
4-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(7) Others
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the filter
Procedures
Rear upper filter
1. Unhook the hook(a) and remove the b
rear upper filter units and remove the
a
rear upper filter(c) from the filter
cover(b).
c
2. Clean or replace the rear upper filter
and refit the filter.
Rear filter
1. Unhook the hook(d) and remove the
rear filter units and remove the rear fil-
ter(f) from the filter cover(e).
2. Clean or replace the rear filter(f) and
refit the filter.
Figure 4-55
4-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-56
Figure 4-57
4-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-58
Figure 4-59
4-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-60
c b
Figure 4-61
IMPORTANT
*: After replacing with the new pickup roller
and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a)
to the position where it is aligned to the
triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-62
4-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Figure 4-63
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
c b
Figure 4-64
4-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-65
Figure 4-66
4-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
Figure 4-67
Figure 4-68
4-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
Figure 4-69
c
b
Figure 4-70
4-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-71
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller sur-
face.
4-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the deck.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and
detach the wire cover (b).
b
Figure 4-72
g
b
f
e
Figure 4-73
4-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-74
Figure 4-75
4-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
手順
1. Detach the PF paper feed unit (a). c
2. Turn over the PF paper feed unit (a).
3. Remove two stop rings (c) from the
separation pulley shaft (b).
d
4. Pull out the spacer (d) from separation
pulley shaft and remove it.
*: Take care not to fall the set pin, when
removing the spacer.
Figure 4-76
Figure 4-77
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.
4-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-78
Figure 4-79
4-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP
separation pulley cover (c).
b c
Figure 4-80
c
b
Figure 4-81
4-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-82
Figure 4-83
4-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-84
Figure 4-85
4-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Detach the DP paper feed guide (a) and
the DP feed unit.
3. Remove hooks (a) and remove the DP
separation pulley cover (c).
a
b
Figure 4-86
Figure 4-87
4-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-88
Figure 4-89
4-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-90
4-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-91
Figure 4-92
4-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select the [Execute] .
4. Select the maintenance kit to set.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the mainte-
nance mode.
6. After transition, execute the setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
MK-8335A
MK-8335D MK-8335B
Start Start
MK-8515A MK-8335E
MK-8515B
U119 Setting the drum *1 U119 Setting the drum *1
(Excute) (Excute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density *1 U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
(Normal Mode)
4-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-93
Figure 4-94
4-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-95
c
d
Figure 4-96
4-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow. b
Figure 4-97
Figure 4-98
4-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
Figure 4-99
Figure 4-100
4-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-101
Figure 4-102
4-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-103
Figure 4-104
4-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-105
(1-8)Detaching and reattaching the left top cover/ the rear left cover.
Procedures
1. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8). b
2. Release two hooks (c) and remove the
left rear cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
a
Figure 4-106
4-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-107
4-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-108
4-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-109
(1-10)Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover
Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover.
2. Open the right cover. c
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
4. Release the hooks (b) and remove the
right rear top cover (c).
c
b
Figure 4-110
4-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-111
4-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b d
Figure 4-112
b
c
d
Figure 4-113
4-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-114
4-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
c
Figure 4-115
4-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-116
a
c
Figure 4-117
4-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-118
4-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
e
Figure 4-119
4-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-120
Figure 4-121
4-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-122
Figure 4-123
4-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-124
Figure 4-125
4-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
b
Figure 4-126
Figure 4-127
4-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-128
b
a
a
Figure 4-129
4-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
b
Figure 4-130
4-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
c
b
Figure 4-131
Figure 4-132
4-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-133
4-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-134
4-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
a
Figure 4-135
b
High-end Model b
Disconnect two FFC connectors (b) and
the FFC connector (c).
Figure 4-136
4-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-137
4-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
CV-1 CV-1
CV-5 CV-5
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 4-138
(6)Open the front cover slightly and open the front cover for maintenance.
(7)Rotate the hex hole (a) by using a hex wrench (5mm).
Direction of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is 2 scales or more (sample 1): counter-clockwise
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale is -2 scales or more (sample 2): clockwise
Number of rotation
The gap between V-1 and V-5 match scale multiplied by 4 clicks.
(8)Close the front cover.
(9)Output the adjustment chart to check it is within the range.
(10)Press the [Stop] key.
4-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a a a
b
a
Figure 4-139
3. Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute (High-end model only)
(1)Input "119" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Starts the drum setup operation.
(3)Press the [Stop] key.
4-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode (High-end model only)
(1)Input "412" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Normal Mode].
(3)Press the [Start] key.
*: Output the test pattern with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
(4)Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern for an original.
(5)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(6)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (2nd sheet)
*: Output with 20% less light intensity than the 1st test pattern.
(7)Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern for an original.
(8)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(9)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (3rd sheet)
(10)Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern for an original.
(11)Press the [Start] key.
*: Check the result of the correction. When correction has normally completed, [Fin] is displayed.
(12)Press the [Stop] key.
6. ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib (High-end model only)
(1)Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Calib].
(3)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Calibration starts.
(4)Press the [Stop] key.
Figure 4-140
4-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-141
E
D
Figure 4-142
4-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-143
D
D
Figure 4-144
4-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-145
a a
a b a
Figure 4-146
4-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
D b
Figure 4-147
Figure 4-148
4-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
E
D
Figure 4-149
Figure 4-150
4-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
a
Figure 4-151
a
b
Figure 4-152
4-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-153
4-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-154
c
IMPORTANT
Use an air blower brush when cleaning the
reflector, light guide plate and diffusion sheet
of the LED mount assembly. Clean not to leave
a hair dust.
Figure 4-155
4-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Detach the right top cover.
2. Detach the ISU right cover.
3. Detach the contact glass.
b
a
Figure 4-156
4-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
Figure 4-157
Figure 4-158
4-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-159
Figure 4-160
4-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d e
c
c
Figure 4-161
b
d c
Figure 4-162
4-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3 5
d d
Figure 4-163
4-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
4. Move the mirror frame B (a) as shown
in the figure and insert two frame secur-
ing tools (c) into the positioning holes
b
(b) at the front and rear of the machine
center to fix the mirror frame B (a) in
position.
c
Figure 4-164
1. Wind the outer scanner wires (a) around the outside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from
above to below. (1)
*: The scanners wires pass the outside of positioning pin.
2. Hook the round terminals (c) to the catches (d) inside the scanner unit. (2)
3. Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from
below to above. (3)
*: The scanner wires pass the lower side of mirror frame B (j).
4. Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to
above. (4)
5. Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from
below to above. (5)
6. Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i). (6)
7. Apply the procedures 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.
4-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
hg
i
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
a
b
i e
h
g
j
b e
d
LQQHU
c a
outer
Figure 4-165
4-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c h
b
a
a h
b
Figure 4-166
4-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-167
4-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
c
YC10
YC9
YC1
YC11
YC6
YC2
YC3
YC7
YC4
YC5
Figure 4-168
a
a
b a
a
a a
Figure 4-169
4-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
slide the rear top cover (b) in the direc-
a
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-170
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-171
4-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-172
b c
Figure 4-173
4-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2
Y C2
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC 32
YC C1
Y
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-174
4-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
b
a
Figure 4-175
IMPORTANT a
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
without detaching the waste toner joint (a), the 1
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected.
c
b
Figure 4-176
4-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-177
4-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-178
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-179
4-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-180
b c
Figure 4-181
4-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
2 2
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
4 28 YC
Y C2 32 YC
YC 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-182
b
a
Figure 4-183
4-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
a
without detaching the waste toner joint (a), the
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 1 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected. c
b
Figure 4-184
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-185
4-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-186
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-187
4-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-188
Figure 4-189
4-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-190
c
b
Figure 4-191
4-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
Figure 4-192
b
c
Figure 4-193
4-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-194
4-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
Attention
When operating in the rear lower side of the
machine with open shield box, pay attention
not to hit the head in the shield box.
Figure 4-195
Figure 4-196
4-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b a
Figure 4-197
4-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-198
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-199
4-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-200
Figure 4-201
4-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-202
c
b
Figure 4-203
4-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
Figure 4-204
b
c
Figure 4-205
4-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-206
b
Attention
When operating in the rear lower side of the
machine with open shield box, pay attention
not to hit the head in the shield box.
Figure 4-207
4-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-208
a
d
4-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-209
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (Eight parts)
c
Figure 4-210
Figure 4-211
4-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
Figure 4-212
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
22
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC C3
2
Y 1
YC
23
a YC
2
YC
29
YC
YC
35
3
YC
a
(b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-213
4-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
b
a
Figure 4-214
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the main drive unit a
without detaching the waste toner joint (a), the
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 1
deform and the waste toner full might be mis- 2
detected.
c
b
Figure 4-215
4-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-216
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
Figure 4-217
4-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b a
a a a
b
Figure 4-218
4-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-219
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-220
4-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-221
Figure 4-222
4-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-223
c
b
Figure 4-224
4-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
Figure 4-225
b
c
Figure 4-226
4-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-227
Figure 4-228
4-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-229
c
a
Figure 4-230
4-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
d
a
d
d c
b
Figure 4-231
4-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4) Others
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Procedures
1. Remove one screws (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-232
c
a
b
Figure 4-233
4-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.
*: Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read
Only mode.
Procedures
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for firmware and data backup)
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
(1)Firmware storage in a USB memory (USB memory A)
1. Store the released firmware set (Main /MMI /BROWSER /DICTIONARY /Language /OCR /Color Table)
in a USB memory.
*: Check the firmware applicable to the target model. When inputting the software of outside the target,
becomes unstable in action.
In order to reboot, require minimum main.
4-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the hard disk: Except Low-end model (100V, 220-
240V model)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-234
b
b
c
b
Figure 4-235
4-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
IMPORTANT
When removing the connector of the hard disk
(a), pay attention not to apply the force on the
battery of the main PWB.
Figure 4-236
a
Figure 4-237
*: Execute maintenance mode U024 (See page 6-31) when formatting a new HDD.
4-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
IMPORTANT
When installing the HDD (a), hold it without a
touching the PWB side (b) to avoid damage.
a
b
Figure 4-238
4-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- a
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-239
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-240
4-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-241
b b
b
b b c
b
Figure 4-242
4-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
c
Figure 4-243
In case of the lower (B)
B db
(1)When attaching the lift motor, remove the
film (b) affixed to the old fan motor (a), dis- a
connect the connector (c) and remove the
wire (d).
*: The film (b) can not be used in the new lift
motor. c
(2)Connect the connector (c) of the wire (d)
once disconnected to the new lift motor (e).
*: Don't fix the wire (d) in the hook (f).
f
e d
Figure 4-244
A
a
B a
Figure 4-245
4-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-246
b b
a a
Figure 4-247
4-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
a
c
a
b
a
Figure 4-248
4-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-249
b
c
b
b b
Figure 4-250
4-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
*: Detach the toner containers (a) (Y,M,C,K) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the solenoid and to
open the container cover.
a
b
Figure 4-251
Figure 4-252
4-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-253
Figure 4-254
4-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-255
c
b
Figure 4-256
4-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-257
c
d
Figure 4-258
4-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-259
Figure 4-260
4-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-261
Figure 4-262
4-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b c
b
b
b c b b
Figure 4-263
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-264
4-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-265
IMPORTANT
Note the waste toner box detection error or
waste toner full detection error in the early
stage may appear if the waste toner box unit is
strained with the wiring.
Figure 4-266
4-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the waste toner a
box unit without detaching the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
1 2
might deform and the waste toner full might be
mis-detected.
c
b
Figure 4-267
a b
Figure 4-268
4-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b
a
a
Figure 4-269
a a
b a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-270
4-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
d
Figure 4-271
b
c
Figure 4-272
4-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-273
4-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-274
Figure 4-275
4-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-276
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner box.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (execute maintenance mode U155): calibration
4-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-7)Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit: High-end model
Procedures
*: Detach the toner containers (a) (Y,M,C,K) while the power is on.
*: If the container cover (b) is locked, execute maintenance mode U033 to activate the solenoid and to
open the container cover.
a
b
Figure 4-277
Figure 4-278
4-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-279
Figure 4-280
4-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-281
c
b
Figure 4-282
4-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-283
c
d
Figure 4-284
4-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-285
Figure 4-286
4-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b b
Figure 4-287
Figure 4-288
4-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b c
b
b
b c b b
Figure 4-289
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-290
4-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-291
IMPORTANT
Note the waste toner box detection error or
waste toner full detection error in the early
stage may appear if the waste toner box unit is
strained with the wiring.
Figure 4-292
4-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the waste toner a
box unit without detaching the waste toner joint
(a), the sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint
1 2
might deform and the waste toner full might be
mis-detected.
c
b
Figure 4-293
a b
Figure 4-294
4-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b
a
a
Figure 4-295
a a
b a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-296
4-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
d
d d
a
Figure 4-297
b
c
Figure 4-298
4-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-299
4-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-300
Figure 4-301
4-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-302
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner bottle unit.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (The Execution of maintenance mode U155): Calibration
4-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
k
c
a
j
h
i
Figure 4-303
High-end Model
k c
m
l
a
j o
g h
f
e b
d i
Figure 4-304
4-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) PWBs
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB (Low-end model)
Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-305
4-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS15 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
Figure 4-306
b b
Figure 4-307
4-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
YS1
YS1
b
Figure 4-308
4-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-309
4-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC1
YC29 YC6
YC36
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC31
YC40
YC34
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC21 YC22
Figure 4-310
b b
Figure 4-311
4-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YS1
b
YC39 YC33
YC34
YC4 YC27
Figure 4-312
4-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-313
(Step 2 to 3 is only IB-35 equipment model)
b
IMPORTANT
When pull the connector (a) out of the connec-
tor of the main PWB (b), straightly pull out
against the main PWB (b) and do not pull out a
c
on the skew.
When pulling out on the skew, it causes the
damage of FPC (f).
d e
Figure 4-314
4-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
d
c
a
c
YC25
YC56 YC35
Figure 4-315
4-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b
a b
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
YC10
YC2
YC51
YC33
YC32 YC42
YC23
Figure 4-316
4-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(1)Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
(3)Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Figure 4-317
4-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main unit No. Maintenance mode relating to
the main unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset U603 User data 1
U251 Maintenance counter clear U604 User data 2
U253 Double/single count switch U610 System 1
U260 Feed/eject counter switch U611 System 2
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting U612 System 3
U402 Print margin adjustment U625 Communication Setting
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table) U695 FAX function customization
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP)
U425 Target adjustment
4-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (Low-end model)
Procedures
1. Remove one screws (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-318
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-319
4-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b a
Figure 4-320
4-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-321
4-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB (High-end model)
Procedures
1. Remove one screws (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear upper cover (b) by slid-
a
ing it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-322
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-323
4-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
b a
Figure 4-324
4-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-325
4-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-326
Figure 4-327
4-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-328
Figure 4-329
4-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
Figure 4-330
d
b
Figure 4-331
4-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-332
Figure 4-333
4-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
Attention
When operating in the rear lower side of the
machine with open shield box, pay attention
not to hit the head in the shield box.
Figure 4-334
4-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC37
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-335
a
d
Figure 4-336
4-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (Eight places)
c
Figure 4-337
c
a
Figure 4-338
4-209
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-7)Detaching and reattaching the low voltage power PWB (Low-end model)
Procedures
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-339
a
a
b a
Figure 4-340
4-210
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
Figure 4-341
IMPORTANT
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c),
make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).
a
Figure 4-342
4-211
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-343
4-212
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
Figure 4-344
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-345
4-213
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
YC8
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-346
4-214
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-8)Detaching and reattaching the lower voltage power PWB (High-end model)
Procedures
c
2
c 3
Figure 4-347
a
a
b a
Figure 4-348
4-215
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
d
Figure 4-349
IMPORTANT
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c),
make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).
a
Figure 4-350
4-216
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
c d
d
e d
c
e e
b
b a
b
b
b
c
e
Figure 4-351
4-217
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
a
Figure 4-352
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-353
4-218
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c
b
a
b
YC2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 YC5
YC3
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-354
4-219
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Figure 4-355
f
e
Figure 4-356
4-220
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b a
Figure 4-357
Figure 4-358
4-221
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-359
Figure 4-360
4-222
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-361
b a
Figure 4-362
4-223
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-363
a
a
Figure 4-364
4-224
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
a
a
Figure 4-365
4-225
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
b
2
a
Figure 4-366
4-226
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
d
c
Figure 4-367
Figure 4-368
4-227
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-369
b
c
d
Figure 4-370
4-228
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-371
b a
a
c
Figure 4-372
4-229
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC11
YC8
YC6
YC4
YC7
YC2
YC5
YC3 YC1
YC10
Figure 4-373
4-230
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-374
c
c
c
c
Figure 4-375
4-231
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-376
4-232
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
b
a
c
b
b
b b
b c
Figure 4-377
Procedure in case of replacing
a b
(1)When attaching the lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), unltach two hooks (d) d
and and remove the wire (c).
Figure 4-378
4-233
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-379
b
a
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-380
4-234
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c a
a
a
Figure 4-381
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-382
4-235
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-383
a
a
Figure 4-384
4-236
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
b b
Figure 4-385
c a
a
a
Figure 4-386
4-237
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-387
b a
b c
Figure 4-388
4-238
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
Figure 4-389
c
b
Figure 4-390
4-239
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
c a
a
a
Figure 4-391
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-392
4-240
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Procedures
1. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
2. Remove PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feed unit (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-393
b a
a
c c
Figure 4-394
4-241
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
b
Figure 4-395
Procedures
1. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
2. Remove PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feed unit (b).
a
a
a
Figure 4-396
4-242
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
Figure 4-397
Figure 4-398
4-243
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
a
Figure 4-399
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
Figure 4-400
4-244
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-401
Figure 4-402
4-245
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-403
Figure 4-404
4-246
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-405
Figure 4-406
4-247
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-407
c
b
Figure 4-408
4-248
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-409
Figure 4-410
4-249
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-411
Figure 4-412
4-250
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-413
Figure 4-414
4-251
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-415
Figure 4-416
4-252
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-417
Figure 4-418
4-253
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-419
Figure 4-420
4-254
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-421
c b
c
f
Figure 4-422
4-255
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-423
Figure 4-424
4-256
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
c
c
Figure 4-425
b
c
Figure 4-426
4-257
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-427
b
c
Figure 4-428
4-258
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-429
Figure 4-430
4-259
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
Figure 4-431
a
a
Figure 4-432
4-260
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-433
Figure 4-434
4-261
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-435
4-262
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-437
Figure 4-438
4-263
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-439
Figure 4-440
4-264
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-441
a
b b
Figure 4-442
4-265
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-443
b c
c
Figure 4-444
4-266
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-445
4-267
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
a
Figure 4-446
a
c
Figure 4-447
4-268
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-448
a
a
Figure 4-449
4-269
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
c
Figure 4-450
b
c
a
a
a b
a
Figure 4-451
4-270
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-452
4-271
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-453
Figure 4-454
4-272
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-455
a b
Figure 4-456
4-273
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC7
YC8 YC13
YC6
8. Check or replace the DF main PWB (a), YC16
YC3
nal position.
b
a b b
Figure 4-457
4-274
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-458
Figure 4-459
4-275
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
b
Figure 4-460
Figure 4-461
4-276
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
Figure 4-462
a a
Figure 4-463
4-277
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
b
c
a
b
Figure 4-464
4-278
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
Figure 4-465
Figure 4-466
4-279
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
a
b
b
Figure 4-467
Figure 4-468
4-280
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 4-469
Figure 4-470
4-281
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5. Disconnect all the connectors from the YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16
YC19
YC8
7. Check or replace the DF main PWB (a), YC7 YC22
YC1
nal position. YC10
YC2
U3
YC23
YC13
a
b
b b
Figure 4-471
4-282
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
MK-8535B -------- RE RE RE RE RE RE RE RE
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CH CL CL CL CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-284
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-285
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(1-2)High-end model
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CH CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-286
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-287
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2) Option
(2-1)DP-7100
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
3LL07531
3M407480
3LL07190
3R724020
X5 3P724170
3R724030
X5 3M824210
3R724040
X3 3M824210
4-288
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
3R729010
X4 3M824210
3R728010
X2 3HK10030
3R729020
X2 3HK10030
3R724060
X2
E <Other section>
3JC04201
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-289
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-2)DP-7110
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
3LL07531
3M407480
3LL07190
3M494200
D <Conveying Section>
3M494070
X8 3M424300
3M424310
3M494090
X10 3LL24190
3M494100
4-290
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
3M494080
3M494110
X3 3M424251
E <Table Section>
F <Other Section>
3JC04201
G <CIS Section>
2 GLASS CIS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-291
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-3) DP-7120
AD
B <Cover>
1 PARTS PAPER FEED ASSY SP 302MV94141 CL RE RE CL:Alcohol or dry cloth (Forwarding/feed pulley)
2MV94141
2MV94150
2MV94160
3M894110
(X5) 3M824220
D <Conveying and Reversing section>
3M824050
X5 3M824210
3M824060
X5 3M824210
3M829100
4-292
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
X4 3M824210
3M828010
X2 3M828040
3M824150
E <Other section>
3JC04201
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-293
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-4)PF-7100
AD
B <Cover>
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2ND94350
2N406030
2ND94340
PULLEYS 2ND94360
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-294
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-5)PF-7110
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
AD
B <Cover>
2ND94700 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2ND94350
2N406030
2ND94340
PULLEYS 2ND94360
PULLEYS 3RC94070
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-295
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-6)PF-7120
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
B <PF Section>
2K906350 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2K906360 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2K906370 RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
3NG94060
5 CLUTCH 50 Z35R 302KV44041 CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
X2 2KV44041 RE
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-296
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-7)AK-7100
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
3RG94020
3RG94040
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-297
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-8)DF-7100
3RD24010
3RD07020
3RD24020
X2 2H722760
3RD36110
X2 3NB36661
X2 3BR07040
X2 3RD36130
X2 3RD36180
10 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER 303NB36500 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3NB36500
11 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT 303RD36200 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
X2 3RD36200
C <Sensor>
4-298
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
x7
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-299
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-9)DF-7110
3RW07010
3RW07030
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
3NB36340
x2 3NB36200
3RW24040
3RW24050
x2 3B817020
x4 3NB24311
11 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
12 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER 303NB36500 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
3NB36500
13 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
4-300
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
14 STATIC-ELIMINATOR SUB EJECT 303NB24300 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
3NB24300
C <Sensor>
x2
x16
3H327460
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-301
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
(2-10)DF-7120
CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
3RW07010
3RW07030
3RW36010
x2 3NB36661
3NC36010
x2 3NB36200
7 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 63212210 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
63212210
8 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER 303NB36500 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
3NB36500
9 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE 303NB36490 CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
x2 3NB36490
C <Sensor>
x2
x8
4-302
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
3H327460
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-303
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
*: The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2ND(high) CTRL
DL_CTRL.2RL(low)
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2ND PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2ND OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 First color table data (Printer) DL_PCLT1.2ND P-CLUT1
7 Second color table data (Printer) DL_PCLT2.2ND P-CLUT2
8 First color table data (Copy) DL_CCLT1.2ND C-CLUT1
9 Second color table data (Copy) DL_CCLT2.2ND C-CLUT2
10 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2ND OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Slot 1 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 INNER PUNCH DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
2 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
3 BOOKLET DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
4 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
5 4000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND DF
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF DL_03RD.2ND INNER-DF
6 DP DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
DL_03R8.2ND DP-CIS
DL_03RJ.2ND DP-LOW
7 A4 Side Paper Feeder DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
5-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[GROUP5 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Panel firmware DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL
5-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file
(skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.
Procedures
1. After turning the power switch (a) on
and the screen is properly displayed,
turn the power switch (a) off.
2. Insert the USB memory (b) with the
firmware into the USB memory slot.
3. Turn the power switch (a) on.
c
b
Figure 5-1
䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢 FW -U PD ATE䢢 䢢 䢢 䢢
4. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indica- 䢢
tor is displayed. &75/ 0$,/%2;
䢢 3$1/ %22./(7
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are 䢢 237 381,7
processed simultaneously. ',&
䢢 %5:6
')
,11(5')
䢢 3&/87 '35(9
3&/87 '3&,6
䢢
&&/87 '3/2:
䢢 &&/87 3)6,'(
2&5 3)81'(5
䢢
)$; (1*1
)$; 631/
,11(538
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
5-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 5-4
5-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Precautions
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the
firmware update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
Start
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error
occurrences. Output the event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occur-
rences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the
maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to output.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci (2) 2016/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (1) Life Count:100000
Figure 6-1
6-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
TASKalfa 6052ci 2016/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
6-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Machine life counter
(8) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in hexa- Date and
occurrence. time of a paper jam. decimal) time of
If the past paper jam occur-
occurrence is less than 16, (a) Cause of paper jam rence
all of them are indicated. (b) Paper source
The oldest log is deleted (c) Paper size
when exceeding 16 (d) Paper type
events. (e) Paper eject
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (P.7-93)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder)
05: Cassette 5 (paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
6-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
6-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the The first two digits (identifi- Date and
occurrence of self diagnos- time of the self diagnostic cation) time of
tics error. error. 01: Service call / System occur-
If the occurrence of the error rence
previous self-diagnostic 02: Unit replacement
error is 8 or less, all of the
diagnostics errors are Next two digits (Auto
logged. reboot information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnos-
tic error, 00 without auto
beboot and 6000 Self diag-
nostic error code.
*: U287 sets the auto
reboot function
6-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 of Total page count at the Maintenance item code (1- Date and
occurrence of unknown time of the replacement of byte value to indicate 2 time of
toner detection. If the the maintenance item. items) occur-
occurrence of the previous rence
unknown toner detection is First byte (Replacing item)
less than 8, all of the The toner replacement log 02: Maintenance kit
unknown toner detection is triggered by toner empty.
are logged. This record may contain Second 1 byte (replace-
such a reference as the ment item type)
toner container is inserted (Low-end model)
twice or a used toner con- 01: MK-8335A
tainer is inserted. 02: MK-8335B
03: MK-8335D
04: MK-8335E
(High-end model)
01: MK-8515A
02: MK-8515B
Last 16 digits
Displays the serial number
of the toner container.
6-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(12) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for main-
tenance Item
Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter Consist of
paper jams depending on self diagnostics errors depending on the mainte- three log
location. depending on cause. nance replacing item. counters
Refer to Paper Jam Log. of paper
The number of auto reboot T: Toner container jams, self
All instances including is also displayed at the 00: Black diagnos-
those not having occurred service call/system error. 01: Cyan tics errors,
are displayed. 02: Magenta and main-
03: Yellow tenance
(Example) CF245: 4(2) replace-
System Error 245 occurred M: Maintenance kit ment
last four times and then (Lower model) items.
executed the auto reboot 01: MK-8335A
twice. 02: MK-8335B
Example: T00: 1
The toner container
(Black) has been replaced
once.
6-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Controller Information
Memory status (38) FRPO Status
(9) Total Size 4.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
Time User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
(10) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam .
(11) Date and Time 06/04/2010 12:00 .
(12) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
Installed Options .
(13) Document Processor Installed .
(14) Paper Feeder LCF(1500X2) .
(15) Side Feeder Not Installed .
(16) SD Card Not Installed .
(17) Finisher Not Installed .
(18) Mail Box Not Installed .
(19) Job Separator Not Installed .
(20) Card Authentication Kit (B) .
Installed .
(21) Internet Fax Kit (A) Not Installed
.
(22) Data Security Kit (E) Installed
.
(23) UG-33 Installed
.
(24) UG-34 Installed
.
(25) USB Keyboard Installed .
(26) USB Keyboard Type US-English PDF mode Y5 00
(27) Scan extention Kit(A) Installed e-MPS error control Y6 03
Print Coverage RP Code
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) (39) 1234 5678 9012
(28) Total (40) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (41) 9012 3456 7890
(29) Copy (42) 3456 7890 1234
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(30) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(31) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(32) Period (27/10/2009 - 03/11/2009 08:40)
(33) Last Page (%) 1.00
FAX Information
(34) Rings (Normal) 3
(35) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(36) Rings (TAD) 3
(37) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Figure 6-2
6-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Send Information
(48) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(49) Address [email protected]
1/2 (50) (51)
(52) 100/100
(53) 0/0/0/0/
(54) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69) (70)(71) (72)
(73) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(74) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(84) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(85) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(86) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(87) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(88) XXXXXXXX/
(89) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (90) (91)
[ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ] (92) (93)
(94) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/
Figure 6-3
6-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
6-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.The normal copy mode is entered.
Contents
Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
3.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the phone number indicated at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the service telephone number at the installation of the machine.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Input keys are indicated on the touch panel.
2.Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch"
occurs.
Caution
Do not execute U004, select [Execute] and press [Start] key if the machine serial number in the
engine PWB is different from the main unit serial number. A different machine serial number is
overwritten in the main PWB.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main
PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :The serial number writing starts.
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
Setting: New ID
1.Select [New ID].
2.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.
* :Either [*] or [#] must be included.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.
6.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Initialize].
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
6-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Verifies that the firmware is not falsified3.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Expected Displays the checksum expected value
Result Displays the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key.
After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The firmware version is displayed.
2.Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
Color Table1(Copy) Color table 1 firmware (copy)
Color Table2(Copy) Color table 2 firmware (copy)
Color Table1(Prn) Color table 1 firmware (printer)
Color Table2(Prn) Color table 2 firmware (printer)
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW DP SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
Side PF Side PF firmware
Side PF Boot Side PF Boot
SMT SSW SMT SSW
PF2 Paper feeder 2 firmware
PF2 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
6-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
PH Punch firmware
PH Boot Punch Boot
MT mailbox Firmware
MT Boot mailbox boot
BF BF firmware
BF Boot BF Boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
Application Name 02 Application 2 firmware
Application Name 03 Application 3 firmware
Application Name 04 Application 4 firmware
Application Name 05 Application 5 firmware
Application Name 06 Application 6 firmware
Application Name 07 Application 7 firmware
Application Name 08 Application 8 firmware
Application Name 09 Application 9 firmware
Application Name 10 Application 10 firmware
Application Name 11 Application 11 firmware
Application Name 12 Application 12 firmware
Application Name 13 Application 13 firmware
Application Name 14 Application 14 firmware
Application Name 15 Application 15 firmware
Application Name 16 Application 16 firmware
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, ser-
vice call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area
specification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Precautions
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document
Box, etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software, color table.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Excute Starts operation
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while "Very High" is selected in the Security
Level settings under the System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is
inserted
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restores the setting values backup from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Data is transferred from an SSD to another via a USB memory.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Flash Updates the firmware
SSD SSD data is backed up and retrieved when a USB memory is installed.
Method:Flash
1.Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data
Method:SSD
1.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the motor to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the paper feed motor
DLP(K) Operate the the developer(BK)/Belt motor
DLP(CMY) Operate the the developer motor(COL)
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor(BK)
Drum(COL) Operate the drum motor(COL)
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser release motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit motor(CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit motor(CCW)
Bridge Operate the BR conveying motor
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor motor
Exit *1 Operate the rear exit motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying
path.
Purpose
Execute to check the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
3.The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Displays the switching status of the conveying sensor
Regist Displays the switching status of the registration sensor
Belt Jam Indicates the state of the switch of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Displays the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Displays the switching status of the duplex sensor 1
DU2 Displays the switching status of the duplex sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Displays the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Displays the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Displays the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Fuser Feed Displays the switching status of the fuser sensor
Inner Job Separator Displays the switching status of the job separator sensor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the clutch to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate the duplex clutch 1
DU2 Operate the duplex clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operates the paper feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the paper feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the solenoid to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation starts.
* :Select the motor before checking the motor rotation.
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the exit solenoid up
Branch Eject Down Operate the exit solenoid down
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(C) Operate the toner container solenoid(C)
Container Cover(M) Operate the toner container solenoid(M)
Container Cover(Y) Operate the toner container solenoid(Y)
Container Cover(K) Operate the toner container solenoid(K)
Motor Operate the motor
4.To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line
LSU Out Top B/W Adjust the leading edge timing (B/W)
LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge registration (3/4 speed)
Mode*1 Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset*1 Reset the conveying timing inspection data
On Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor ON)
Off Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor retrieve time)
6-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward
when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)
6-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward
when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)
6-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward
when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)
6-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2.0 mm)
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034 < U067(P.6-62) < U072(P.6-67)
6-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Execution: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Operation is started and data is reset
Items Contents
Execute Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Items Contents
Value(Plain) Check the measured value(Plain)
Value(Thick) Check the measured value(Thick)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the printable area when copyng with Folio paper.
Purpose
Setting the actual size of Folio to use prevents the image dropout at the trailing edge or right/left
edges.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the fan motor to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Each operation starts.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan motor
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan motor
DLP1*1 Operate the developer fan motor Y
DLP2*1 Operate the developer fan motor C
DLP3*1 Operate the developer fan motor M
DLP4*1 Operate the developer fan motor BK
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor
Exit Paper IH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan motor
Toner*1 Operates the toner suction fan motor
LVU Operate the power source fan motor
Belt Cooling Operate the transfer belt fan motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded
in a Z-shape.
* :Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
B/W
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
3/4
6-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-8
6-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-9
6-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-10
6-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
Motor1 Sets the Motor1
Motor2 Sets the Motor2
Motor3 Sets the Motor3
Motor4 Sets the Motor4
Motor5 *1 Sets the Motor5
Motor6 *1 Sets the Motor6
Motor1 Half Sets the Motor1 Half
Motor2 Half Sets the Motor2 Half
Motor3 Half Sets the Motor3 Half
Motor1 3/4 Sets the Motor1 3/4
Motor2 3/4 Sets the Motor2 3/4
Motor3 3/4 Sets the Motor3 3/4
Initial setting
6-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Motor2
1.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
Setting: Motor3
1.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Motor4
1.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Motor5
1.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
Initial setting
6-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
Initial setting
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the conveying fan motor drive mode during paper conveying.
Purpose
A fan is added in the conveying unit so that the leading edge of paper is conveyed along with the
conveying path to prevent paper creases.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Sets the Cooling Cycle
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning docu-
ment processor is installed)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning
the shading plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or
scratch of the shading plate.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and
toward the right side if the value is reduced.
Precautions
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the
above incorrect
Precautions
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depend-
ing on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-59)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-59)
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
Figure 6-11
6-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 6-12
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward
when the setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-13
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U066
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-14
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U067
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used
* :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is
changed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to adjust.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward
when the setting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
Sub Scan (B) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Main Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the main -100 to 100 0 0.02%
Scan(CIS) scanning direction when duplex scanning
(CIS)
Sub Scan Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
(CIS) scanning direction when duplex scanning
(CIS)
6.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting
value is decreased.
Figure 6-15
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
DP-7100
DP-7110
DP-7120
6-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 6-16
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U071
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-17
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image
when the DP is used
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
6.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the copy example 1, decrease the value.
For the copy example 2, increase the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
setting value is decreased.
Figure 6-18
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U067(P.6-62) > U072
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit
glass.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key.
* :Scanning starts with the condition specified.
5.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals
with slightly thick background Adjusts the image difference between the table scanning and DP
scanning CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned
data after the original feed, change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning
position when using the document processor.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :If the set value is reduced, dark density image is regarded as dust and dust detection
becomes more likely.
If the set value is increased, dust detection becomes less likely.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scan-
ner section using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
* :Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and
page count displayed on the service status page.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the MIP-PG pattern to output
Items Contents
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
Color Belt PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four
color PG)
6-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Gray(K) For drum quality check (Gray PG)
cyan
magenta
green
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty appli-
cation
PG for the developer status and engine ID check (four color PG)
For drum quality check (Yellow PG)
For drum quality check (Cyan PG)
For drum quality check (Magenta PG)
For drum quality check (Gray PG)
3.Press the [System Menu] key.
4.Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
5.Press the [System Menu] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)
6-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Execute
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Starts retaining the white reference data.
3.Press the [System Menu] key.
4.Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
* :Match the original and paper size.
5.Press the [Start] key.
* :Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about
60mm width)
6.Setting is correctly complete if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.
If a vertical black line appears on blank paper or a gray band or vertical white line appear on
the black band, execute the white line correction again after cleaning the CIS roller or CIS
glass.
White line correction is complete if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white lines.
However, check the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
7.Press the [System Menu] key.
* :Mode is set to [1].
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets the original size detection check and detection threshold
Purpose
Changes the detection threshold if the original size is often mis-detected with entirely dark origi-
nals (high density) or dark originals at edges only.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Data1 Display of the original width of RGB each three color
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display of the original copies width of RGB each three color (when the
document processor is installed)
Execution: Data1/Data2
1.Place an original copy on the table and close the original copy cover or document processor.
2.The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size
sensor detects the original lengthwise. (Detected twice when the document processor is
installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected number of pixels (mm) in the original width
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)
6-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can
be detected but the original mat may be detected as an original.
* :If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of
placing the original.
Figure 6-19
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Adj AC Bias *1 Adjust the main charge AC bias of each color
Set AC Auto Adj *1 Sets the automatic AC bias adjustment
Set DC Auto Adj *2 Sets the automatic DC bias adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Displays the main charge DC bias correction value for each color.
(Adjusted value before correction)
Set DC Bias After Displays the main charge DC bias base value for each color. (Adjusted
value after correction)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq *1 Sets the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current *1 Displays the electric current flows
Set AC Gain *1 Sets the AC Gain
6-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(C) Cyan main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(M) Magenta main charge DC bias correction value (Full speed)
DC1 Bias(Y) Yellow main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
6-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
Items Contents
C Cyan inflow current
M Magenta inflow current
Y Yellow inflow current
K Black inflow current
Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
6-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Value
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting (default)
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
6-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Voltage Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Sets the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Sets the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohabit Reflection Sets the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Excute Sets the forcing primary transfer feedback
Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction
Setting: Voltage
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Target Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Step
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Value
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
6-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
Initial setting
6-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
Setting: Current
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
6-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Target
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
6-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Initial setting
6-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Setting of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback
result On
Off Setting of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback
result: Off
Items Contents
Execute Forcibly executes the primary transfer feedback
Items Contents
On Setting of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer
feedback On
Off Setting of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer
feedback: Off
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3
Heavy4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4 / 5
OHP Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
Setting: 1st / 2nd / 1st 3/4(Gloss) / 2nd 3/4(Gloss) / 1st B/W / 2nd B/W
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
[1st]
Initial setting
[2nd]
Initial setting
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting
[1st B/W]
Initial setting
[2nd B/W]
Initial setting
6-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Heavy1
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
[1st 3/4]
Initial setting
[2nd 3/4]
Initial setting
6-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Heavy2/3
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
[1st Half]
Initial setting
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
6-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Heavy4/5
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
[1st Half]
Initial setting
[2nd Half]
Initial setting
6-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: OHP
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
Setting: Bias
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Sets the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
Purpose
Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
Setting: Belt(A)
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: Belt(B)
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Description
Sets the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
Purpose
Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Output B/W Separation Shift bias output adjustment at B/W mode
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position
Subtranction Value Subtracted value for the separation bias (correction by fuser count)
Setting: Output
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
6-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Initial setting
Output 3/4
Output B/W
6-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Timing
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum counter
M Displays the magenta drum counter
Y Displays the yellow drum counter
K Displays the black drum counter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the drum number.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum number
M Displays the magenta drum number
Y Displays the yellow drum number
K Displays the black drum number
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum history
M Displays the magenta drum history
Y Displays the yellow drum history
K Displays the black drum history
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the initial LSU luminosity based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Detect the main charge current and save the current value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Displays the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to displays the drum drive distance counter.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the count.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan drum drive distance counter
M Displays the magenta drum drive distance counter
Y Displays the yellow drum drive distance counter
K Displays the black drum drive distance counter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Displays the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Execution
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the primary transfer unit number
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Description
Displays the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Confirms the machine number and primary transfer unit counter
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine Number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the primary/secondary transfer unit counts after replacing. Also, clear the secondary trans-
fer counts after replacement.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* : The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Displays the primary transfer counts
2nd Trans(Cnt) Displaying the secondary transfer counts
Mid Trans(Time) Displays the primary transfer unit drive time counts
2nd Trans(Time) Displays the secondary transfer unit drive time counts
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up by the drum.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Adjusts the the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit fail-
ure,etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Mode Change manual adjustment/automatic adjustment
Setting: Manual
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Method: Auto
1.The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(C) Toner sensor(C) default control voltage
Default(M) Toner sensor(M) default control voltage
Default(Y) Toner sensor(Y) default control voltage
Default(K) Toner sensor(K) default control voltage
6-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is often detected.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Installs toner
Items Contents
Supply(C) Cyan toner supply level
Supply(M) Magenta toner supply level
Supply(Y) Yellow toner supply level
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(C) Cyan toner sensor output value
Sensor(M) Magenta toner sensor output value
Sensor(Y) Yellow toner sensor output value
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Precautions
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside
and it may lock up.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :The operation starts.
Items Contents
Toner Drives the toner motor MCY
Toner(BK) Drives the toner motor BK
Hopper Drives the toner motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval
between toner near end and toner empty is too short.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty
becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside
humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (°C)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1.Displays the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Method: LSU
1.Displays the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanning Unit (°C)
Method: Developing
1.Displays the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (°C)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Displays/changes the developer bias set values or sets high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias set values.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Sleeve DC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC *1 Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq *1 Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty *1 Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Freq *2 Set the developer magnet roller frequency.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib *1 Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Sets the toner density
Altitude Adjustment Sets the altitude adjustment mode
6-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: Mag DC
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
*1: 60 ppm only, *2: High-end model only, *3: Low-end model only
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Mag AC
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
*1: High-end model only, *2: 60 ppm model only, *3: Low-end model only
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
6-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
6-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: AC Calib
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
1.Setup at high altitude
2.When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3.When the developer leakage occurs
4. When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibra-
tion
Magnification Setting the AC calibration target bias value
Execution timing
1. When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
Setting: Calibration
1.Select the item to set.
2.Changes the developer to execute AC calibration.
* :When the density of solid image is dropped, select "Type" and chose "+1". (High altitude
grain mode)
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
5.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
* :An error code appears when there is an error.
Setting: Type
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents
0 Continue the present setting and execute AC calibration
+1 Set high altitude grain mode On and execute AC calibration
+2 Cancel high altitude grain mode setting and execute AC calibration
6-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
* :(High altitude grain mode) Perform AC calibration in a high altitude installation and improve
that image density becomes lighter.
The following are automatically changed if "+1" is set up in the Type.
If current setting is [Normal2] or [Normal3] which is changed to [Normal1].
The U161 [GRAIN MODE] is set to [Mode2]
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Magnification
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents
Normal Sets 1000m or less
1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m
3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Mode selection for the operation to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner apply-
ing mode). Also, sets the operation to take toner accumulated on the developer blade back to the
developer unit (vibration motor control).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute to change the vibration motor
control frequency.
* :Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Timing Sets the toner apply timing
Mode Sets the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Sets the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation
Initial setting
6-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Displays the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check each color's output value when an image failure occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to refer to.
* :Switched to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Displays the toner sensor value
Toner Displays the toner sensor value and supply level value for each color
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Items Contents
Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Near Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 2 (WTS2)
Method: Toner
1.Displays the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(C) Displays the cyan toner sensor output value
Sensor(M) Displays the magenta toner sensor output value
Sensor(Y) Displays the yellow toner sensor output value
Sensor(K) Displays the black toner sensor output value
6-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Calibration
1.Display each setting values.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Displays the waste toner weight detection sensor output value
Mode Displays the calibration execution mode
None Displays the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Displays the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Full Displays the adjustment value (full bottle)
Level Displays the accumulate waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays and adjusts the toner supply level for each color.
Purpose
Execute displaying and adjusting the toner empty level for each color.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Displays the toner empty level
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan toner empty level
M Displays the magenta toner empty level
Y Displays the yellow toner empty level
K Displays the black toner empty level
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the developer drive time.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit drive time.
M Displays the Magenta developer unit drive time.
Y Displays the Yellow developer unit drive time.
K Displays the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Displays the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
C Displays the cyan developer counter.
M Displays the magenta developer counter.
Y Displays the yellow developer counter.
K Displays the black developer counter.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Display/set/clear the toner disposed of from the developer unit and set the use of the BK toner
container as the waste toner box.
Purpose
Display/set/clear the toner disposed of from the developer unit.
Sets the message display to replace the waste toner box with the BK toner container and job
control at BK toner empty or depending on waste toner amount in the waste toner box.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Display setting of the toner container lock
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
Items Contents
On Displays the unlock operation
Off Not to display the unlock operation
6-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl,
creases and fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode Control for the impalpable uneveness in glossiness
Ready Time Adjust Setting the low-temperature aging temperature
Setting: Warm Up
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Initial setting
100V
120V
220-240V
6-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Setting: Print
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Initial setting
100V
120V/ 220-240V
Items Contents
Mode0 Present state control mode (Usually not used)
Mode1 Improvement mode for the impalpable uneveness inglossiness
Mode2 More improvement
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Displays the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser counter values.
Execution
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the fuser counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Description
Displays the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Execution
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the fuser unit number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Displays the fuser count.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* : The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the fuser count
Release(Time) Displays the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Displays the fuser unit drive time (press)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Displays and settings the reference voltage of the IH PWB.
Purpose
To check the reference voltage
* :When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Set Fuser Destination setting for Fuser
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Description
Change the fuser control setting
Purpose
When the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunctions due to the fuser setting, the fuser control
setting is changed.
* :IThis is noise canceller from antishoplifting system for Japan market.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Security Gate Set the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Items Contents
On Turn on the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Off Turn off the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
Figure 6-20
6-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge 1 Displays the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Displays the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Middle Displays the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Press Roller Center Displays the press roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :All the LEDs on the operation panel are blinking.
4.Press the [Stop] key to turn the display off.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation
panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
* :When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position
error and unable to enter the maintenance mode, press and hold [Home], [Stop] and [Reset]
keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position
Check Checks the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
6-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1.Press the center of indicated three "+", and
then check the display position. Initialize
(4, -1)
6-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Step.1.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scanning
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD
CIS With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous
operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous
operation)
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous
operation)
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key to reset.
6-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Result
1.Displays the conveying timing data.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Device Sets the key card/key counter connection.
Message Sets the message indicated when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1.Select the type of the optional counter.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Off Not installed
Setting: Message
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Key Device Prioritized display of the key device on the login screen when multiple
devices are used.
Coin Vendor Prioritized display of the coin vendor on the login screen when multiple
devices are used .
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, sets the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is
installed. (This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification
machines.)
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
On/Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size and color
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Extended charge unit price
Items Contents
On The coin vender is installed
Off The coin vender is not installed
Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage
Off Do nothing at coin shortage
6-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Price
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
B/W Black & White
CMY Single color C, M, Y
RGB Single color R, G, B
Full Color Full color
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
Setting: Print
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
B/W Black & White
Full Color Full color
6-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Apl
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.
Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2.[Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3.Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by
one. When pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the
LED is lit.
* :The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets the size of paper used in Side Paper Feeder
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side paper feeder or the size of paper used in the side
paper feeder is changed.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Cassette3 Setting the paper size for Cassette3
Cassette4 Setting the paper size for Cassette4
Cassette5 Setting the paper size for Cassette5
Setting
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side paper feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side paper feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side paper feeder: Letter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the inner job separator installation setting.
Purpose
Execute when installing the inner job separator.
* :Make sure to set to [Off] to prevent wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Inner Job Separator].
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Inner job separator setting
Method
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Installing the inner job separator
Off The inner job separator is not installed
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the
USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Host Lock].
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off
Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the
users other than those with administrator privileges.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution
setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution set-
ting and Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and
theimage data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Press the [Start] key.
5.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
6-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Caution
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping
at recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem
occurrence.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor serial number.
Finisher Displays the finisher serial number.
Booklet Displays the book let folder serial number.
PF1 Displays the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Displays the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Main Tray].
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box Mail Box motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
1.Select the item to operate.
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :The operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at high speed
Save(L) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at low speed
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and
descends again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off.
ascends again when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the
upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.
6-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the punch motor.
Punch Move *2 Drive the punch slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan motor.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only. *2: Except Inner finisher
* :To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Method: Solenoid
1.Select the item to operate.
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :The operation starts.
Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
Items Contents
Conv Drives the MB drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MB drive motor for feed-shift
6-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Booklet
1.Select the item to operate.
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :The operation starts.
Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drives the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drives the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drives the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the BF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the mail Box switch and sensor operation.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
1.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
* :The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover switch
Eject Cover DF exit cover switch
Top Cover *2 DF top cover switch
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF Tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF paper entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub tray exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor
Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle Tray DF bundle exit sensor
Width Front HP DF width adjustment 1
Width Tail HP DF width adjustment 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1
6-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor
Press Paper Up *4 DF press paper sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF press paper sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
*1: 4000-sheet only, *2: 1000-sheet finisher only, *3: Except Inner finisher, *4: Inner finisher only
Items Contents
Eject MB tray exit sensor
Cover MB cover open close switch
Over Flow1 MB tray sensor 1
Over Flow2 MB tray sensor 2
Over Flow3 MB tray sensor 3
Over Flow4 MB tray sensor 4
Over Flow5 MB tray sensor 5
Over Flow 6 MB tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MB tray sensor 7
Motor HP MB home position switch
6-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Booklet
1.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
* :The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper detection sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjustment sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjustment sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set BF set switch
left Guide BF left cover switch
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Method: Punch
1.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
* :The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 Punch home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
Edge Face 2 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 2
Edge Face 3 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 3
Edge Face 4 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 4
Tank Punch tank set switch
Tank Full Punch tank full sensor
HP *2 PH paper entry sensor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP papaer feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor
Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP eject motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
* :The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Feed Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head *2 Check DP timing sensor.
Set Check DP original detection sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit *3 Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit *3 Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP top cover switch.
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject *3 Check DP eject sensor.
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.
* :Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the
message of the designated number.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the punch mode.
Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the punch mode.
Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the punch mode.
Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
Adjustment of front/rear shift home position
Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment value setting of folding unit
6-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Finisher
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Width *2 Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-21
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :Increase the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Reduce the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 6-22
6-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Reduce the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Increase the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
Center line
(within ± 0.5 mm)
Sample 1 Sample 2
Setting: Staple HP
1.Select [Staple HP].
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-23
Method: Booklet
1. Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position
6-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper
× 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-24
* :Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
6-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Figure 6-25
6-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-26
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to operate.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Side Feeder Operate the side paper feeder
Setting: 2PF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Starts operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
6-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: LCF
1.Select the item to set.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Starts operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF paper feed solenoid: ON
Execute Starts operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Purpose
Execute to check the 4000-sheet finisher operation
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Punch Position Check the stop position of punching
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the folding unit
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder
only
4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
*1: Low-end model only, *2: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *3: 3000-sheet side paper feeder
only
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before
replacement or initialization
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
6-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Color] or [B/W].
Items Contents
Full Color Switch the counter for full color mode (Single/Double Count)
Mono Color *1 Switch the counter for mono color (Single/Double Count)
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set single count for A3(420mm) size or smaller
DBL(B4) Set single count for Legal(356mm) size or smaller
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
* :Initial setting:
SGL(All) (100V model), DBL(A3/Ledger) (120V/ 220-240V model)
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035.
However, the double count will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or lon-
ger.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Selects the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Items Contents
No. Displays the OEM code
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
* :If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Set the single color count mode
Purpose
Execute to change the billing counter to count up in the single color mode.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Mode0 Count the single color count in the full color counter
Mode1 Count the single color count in the single color counter
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Today].
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :Sets the delivery date of the machine.
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Clears the delivery date of the machine.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets whether to use the 2-color copy.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On 2-color copy enabled
B/W *1 2-color copy enabled, B/W count
Mono Color *1,*2 2-color copy enabled, mono color count
Off 2-color copy disabled
* :Initial setting: Mono Color (100V model), Off (120V/ 220-240V model)
* :When setting it to on, 2-color copy appears on the color function screen.
*1: 100V model only, *2: Appears if U276 set to other than [Mode0]
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
* :Initial setting: On
3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Sets the optional languages selectable from System Menu
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Option Language 1 Optional language 1 setting
Option Language 2 Optional language 2 setting
Option Language 3 Optional language 3 setting
Option Language 4 Optional language 4 setting
Option Language 5 Optional language 5 setting
* :Initial setting: On
3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
4.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
C0XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service
call error
C1XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C1xxx
code service call error
C2XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C2xxx
code service call error
C3XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C3xxx
code service call error
C4XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C4xxx
code service call error
C5XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C5xxx
code service call error
C6XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C6xxx
code service call error
C7XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C7xxx
code service call error
C8XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C8xxx
code service call error
C9XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C9xxx
code service call error
CFXXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the CF
code service call error
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
* :Initial setting: On
3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets the print interval at high coverage.
Purpose
Changes the print interval at high coverage.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the con-
tact glass when scanning from the document processor.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication
Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
* :Initial setting: On
4.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting
Sets the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Mode1 Sets the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Sets the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Sets the cassette heater control Off (not installed).
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert
the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Sets the drum heater
Purpose
Sets the drum heater setting display and drum heater setting in System Menu
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
System Check if the drum heater setting in System Menu is displayed or not.
Drum Heater Sets the drum heater
Setting
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Adj Memory Sets the memory allocation
Adj Max Job Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
* :The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
2.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it
cannot be used for copy.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :Multiple cassettes are selectable.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source
Cassette2 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source
Cassette 3 *1 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cassette 4 *1 Setting cassette 4 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Cassette 5 *2 Setting cassette 5 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Sett the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by set-
ting the number of prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Displays the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value
before the maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
Items Contents
On The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.
Off The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.
* :Initial setting: On
* :Peel off the energy saver label when setting it to off
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
* :If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
* :If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on
the second page.
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to set.
6.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
6.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Figure 6-28
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-198) > U403
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Figure 6-29
6-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-198) > U403(P.6-199) > U404
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing when duplex printing.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the
scanner reading image (image on the memory)
Precautions
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-198) > U66(P.6-61) >
U403(P.6-199) > U71(P.6-65) > U404(P.6-200) > U407
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select [Adj Data].
Figure 6-30
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the execution information screen.
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4 paper.
2.Set the test pattern output on the original glass with the arrow facing the rear side and print
side face-down.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 6-31
3.Press the [Start] key.
* :The first auto adjustment is executed.
4.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 2.
5.Press the [Start] key.
* :The second auto adjustment is executed.
6.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
7.An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error codes
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the
DP scanning sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberra-
tion in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color cor-
rection matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF cor-
rection, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
6-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value
1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment
original (P/N: 7505000005) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) on the table.
3.Enter maintenance item U411.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
6.Press the [Start] key.
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
9.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when
adjusting it with ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA
(color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) face-up on the DP.
*:Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 6-32
6-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
2.Enter maintenance item U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
5.Press the [Start] key.
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 7505000005) face-up on the DP.
2.Enter maintenance item U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
5.Press the [Start] key.
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
6-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
* :When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs
during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case,
check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
6-209
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-210
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-211
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Scan the test pattern image distribution directly from the scanner .
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
* :After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
1st retrial
8.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
9.Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
10.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
11.Execute Step 3 to 7
* :An error code appears when an error occurs.
6-212
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction
* :Initial setting: On
* :Automatically set to on after completing correction.
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-213
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjusting the leading edge timing, enter line and margins
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
* : * Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(302AC68243) is not available.
Method
1.Set A3/Ledger paper.
* :Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
2.Press the [Start] key.
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key.
* :A test pattern is outputted.
5.Set the output Test Pattern as the original.
6.Press the [Start] key.
* :Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
* :An error code appears when there is an error.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-214
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Description
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Execution
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
Gray2 Setting the Gray2 patch for the adjustment original
Gray3 Setting the Gray3 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
6-215
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Black
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: Gray1
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: Gray2
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: Gray3
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
6-216
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: C
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: M
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: Y
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: R
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
6-217
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: G
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
Setting: B
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.
1.Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of
black belt 3 of the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the
left edge, B: 105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
?Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2.Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
4.Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment
original.
Measurement procedure
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the
right edge of black belt 2.
5.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
6-218
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Black
belt 2
D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: 7505000005)
Figure 6-33
6-219
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: DP(ChartB)
* :This setting is usually unnecessary.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment
original.
2.Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside)
on the adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
7.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Main Scan
Lead
Sub Scan
Figure 6-34
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-220
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays/changes the density of each color in various image quality mode.
Purpose
Execute to change each color's balance.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select the image mode to change the setting.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Text+Photo Density of each color in the text+photo mode
Photo Density of each color in the photo mode
Photo/Printout Each color's density in the printed photo mode
Text Density of each color in the text mode
Graphics/Map Density of each color in the map mode
Copy/Printout Each color's density in the printed document mode
Setting: Text+Photo
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Photo
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
6-221
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Photo/Printout
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Text
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Graphics/Map
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Copy/Printout
1.Select the item to set.
6-222
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image gets thicker, and it is thinner when the set-
ting value is decreased.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-223
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Executes each setting of
the calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Select the length of thecalibration cycle
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Setting the time to determine whether to execute calibration when recov-
ering from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the target sensor value for the toner thick layer calibration and
light intensity calibration
Print Rate(B/W) Setting the B/W calibration target value
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
6-224
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Short 0: Calibration cycle setting: Short
Normal 1: Calibration cycle setting: Normal
Long 2: Calibration cycle setting: Long
Custom 3: Calibration cycle setting: Custom
Auto 4: Calibration cycle setting: Auto
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: AP/NE
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
6-225
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Calib
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Calibration is started.
Items Contents
Execute Executes Full Calibration
Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-226
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to check.
* :The screen is switched.
Items Contents
Laser Power Primary transfer belt durability
Laser Power(En) Displays the exposure level
Laser Power(Drum) Displays the drum exposure level at half-life (Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Displays the maximum exposure level (Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan light intensity control value.
M Displays the Magenta light intensity control value.
Y Displays the Yellow light intensity control value.
K Displays the Black light intensity control value.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan exposure level
M Displays the Magenta exposure level
Y Displays the Yellow exposure level
K Displays the Black exposure level
Items Contents
C Displays the drum exposure level at half-life (Cyan) (Drum)
M Displays the drum exposure level at half-life (Magenta) (Drum)
6-227
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Y Displays the drum exposure level at half-life (yellow) (Drum)
K Displays the drum exposure level at half-life (Black) (Drum)
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan maximum exposure level (Max)
M Displays the Magenta maximum exposure level (Max)
Y Displays the Yellow maximum exposure level (Max)
K Displays the Black maximum exposure level (Max)
Items Contents
C Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (cyan)
M Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Magenta)
Y Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Yellow)
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
C T7 control value (Cyan)
M T7 control value (Magenta)
Y T7 control value (Yellow)
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-228
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the operation of the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Also, sets the execution condition of the color registration correction by the LSU temperature
variation.
Purpose
If the color registration is unstable due to the sensor failure, etc., set it to off to temporarily fix the
control value.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Color Regist Sets the color registration correction
Timing Execute the color registration correction if the LSU temperature changes
by the specified value after the previous correction
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting the color registration correction operation
Off 0: Prohibiting the color registration correction operation
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Setting: Timing
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-229
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the color registration correction data and transfer belt speed correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to refer to.
* :The screen is switched.
Items Contents
V Correction Displays the primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Auto(C) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Cyan)
Auto(M) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Magenta)
Auto(Y) Displaying the automatic color registration correction value (Yellow)
Manual(C) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Cyan)
Manual(M) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Magenta)
Manual(Y) Displays the manual color registration correction value (Yellow)
Reference: V Correction
* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
Status Primary transfer belt speed adjustment value
Items Contents
Main Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the main scanning
direction.
Sub Scan Automatic color registration adjustment value in the sub scanning direc-
tion.
Magnification Automatic color registration correction value for magnification
Items Contents
Main Scan Manual color registration adjustment value in the main scanning direc-
tion.
Sub Scan Manual color registration adjustment in the sub scanning direction.
Magnification 1-6 Manual color registration correction value 1 for magnification 1-6
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-230
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Perform the color registration correction and transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Adjustment when the color registration shift (transfer shift) appears on print.
Execute when replacing the transfer belt unit or laser scanner unit.
* :Make sure to execute U464 Calib before executing the color registration correction.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :Select [Auto] to output the automatic adjustment chart.
* :Select [Manual] to enter the setting display.
Items Contents
Auto Executing the auto color registration correction
Manual Executing the manual color registration correction
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Auto
1.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Print Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Execute Start scanning and execute the automatic adjustment.
Method: Print
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Output the automatic adjustment chart.
Method: Excute
1.Place an original on the table and press the [Start]
key.
* :Execute the automatic adjustment.
2.When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is
displayed.
* :An error code appears when there is an error. Chart for adjustment
Error codes list
6-231
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-232
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Manual
1.Select the item to execute.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Regist Sets the color registration adjustment value
Print Output the manual adjustment chart.
Method: Print
1.Press the [Start] key to output the manual adjustment chart.
Chart sample
There are H-1 to 7 in the chart For each color of m, c and y (upper part).
Figure 6-35
Find the positions where two lines are best matched on each chart.
* :If it is at "0", the correction is unnecessary. In case of the illustration below, "B" is the value
that should be set.
Figure 6-36
6-233
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Regist
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys change the setting value.
6-234
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-235
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce
the image roughness by changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged
copy . If the set value is reduced, compression is high and image quality is lowered. If the set
value is increased, image quality is improved but processing speed is slower.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy
Send Compression rate of the Send
System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system
Print Compression rate for printer
Method: Copy
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
Setting: Photo
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Text
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-236
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Send
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Sets the compression rate for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression prior-
ity).
Setting: Photo
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Text
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-237
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-238
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: System
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Print
1.Select the item to set.
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-239
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, sets the cleaning operation
interval and timing to enter the operation.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Execute Executes the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Sets the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle
1.Select the item to set.
Setting: Cnt
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :Settable in 500-sheet increments
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-240
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
Contents
Sets the PDF image rotation method. Also, changes/installs the color table.
Purpose
Execute to change the PDF image rotation method.
Execute to change the copy and printer color mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Mode Set the image process mode
Color Table Sets the color table
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
setting Contents
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Items Contents
Color Table 1(Prn) Setting the default printer color table
Color Table 2(Prn) Sets the custom printer color table
Color Table1(Copy) Setting the default copy color table
Color Table2(Copy) Sets the custom copy color table
Install Color table installation
Uninstall(Prn) Uninstalling the printer color table
Uninstall(Copy) Uninstalling the copy color table
6-241
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
setting
TYPE_CA
TYPE_FJ
TYPE_HE
TYPE_KO
TYPE_KY*1
TYPE_RH
TYPE_ST*2
TYPE_TO
setting
CTYPE_A1*1
CTYPE_CA
CTYPE_FJ
CTYPE_KO
CTYPE_KY*2
CTYPE_SH
CTYPE_RH
CTYPE_TO
Method: Install
* :Insert the USB memory with the color table files before selecting them.
Check if there is the color table file in the root folder of a USB memory.
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Color table installation
6-242
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Code Contents
OK Normal completion
E001 Error in connecting a USB memory
E002 Error in handling a file
EFFF Other errors
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-243
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the operation mode after detecting color originals with color/BW mixed originals.
Purpose
Mode: To prioritize the productivity when copying color/BW mixed originals in ACS mode, change
the setting to Mode3. However, if setting it to Mode3, even when monochrome originals come
after color originals, C/M/Y developer maintenance counts are counted up.
Permission: set in case of color background image when printing an envelope in BW half speed
mode processed as color printing.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Mode Color/BW mode setting
Permission Permit monochrome printing at half speed
Setting: Mode
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Mode1 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome
mixed mode is not high during continuous printing.
Monochrome printing remains in the color process speed after switching
to color and other process is switched .
Mode2 For users mostly printing in monochrome mode and color/monochrome
mixed mode is not high during continuous printing.
Even when receiving a monochrome print request during color printing,
color printing operation is continued until 9 pages and color mode is
switched to monochrome mode when starting printing of the 10th page
(Color process is stopped).
Mode3 Appropriate for users who mostly print in color.
Once switched to the color mode, monochrome printing after that
remains in the color process including the surface speed.
Auto Mode 1 to 3 is automatically selected depending on the user's usage.
Select Mode 1 to 3 based on color print ratio and switch rate from the
print volume during the specified period.
6-244
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: Permission
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Permit: monochrome printing (three colors separated)
Off Prohibit: color printing (four color process)
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-245
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration
3.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Registers Access Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code
4.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Sets the TDRS Username
Access Code Sets the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username
Text Sets the TDRS description
6-246
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error codes
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contensts
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state
Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-247
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX
PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered con-
tents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
* :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
* :Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
6-248
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-249
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the des-
tination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
* :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
6-250
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-251
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
4.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-252
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto
reduction mode.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/Let-
terR) in the auto reduction mode.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
6-253
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-254
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U611 System 2
(Message: System Setting 2)
Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-255
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-256
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U612 System 3
(Message: System Setting 3)
Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-257
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U615 System 6
(Message: System Setting 6)
Contents
Sets the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification
machine
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-258
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection
Cont Sets the continuous type detection
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-259
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to
complete transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Setting: Times
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-260
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality
line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Sets the reception speed.
TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the
sender.
RX Echo Sets the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability,
V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destina-
tion unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
6-261
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when
an error occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
* :Initial setting: 75
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-262
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
* :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
* :Completed is displayed.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
* :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
6-263
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-264
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-265
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and recep-
tion.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
6-266
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
10% Error line rate of 10%
15% Error line rate of 15%
20% Error line rate of 20%
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-267
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Exe-
cute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
* :Relax the communication conditions
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [TCF Check].
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-268
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-269
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Sets the T0 time-out time.
T1 TIME OUT Sets the T1 time-out time.
T2 TIME OUT Sets the T2 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Sets the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Sets the Td time-out time.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-270
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
6-271
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call
in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception
error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
1.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-272
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-273
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-274
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
6-275
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Off Detects the loop current before dialing.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-276
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
* :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print
Jobs] is pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
3.Press the [Start] key.
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-277
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clears the FAX/i-FAX communication history and scheduled FAX transmission backup data in
the FAX PWB.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to output.
Items Contents
RESERVATION Clears the scheduled FAX data in the FAX PWB.
CLEAR
RECOVERY FAX Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
DIMM
FAX DIMM CLEAR Clears all the data in the DIMM.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-278
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
1.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
* :Initial setting: On
2.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
* :[Completed] is displayed.
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-279
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Sets the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Sets only when different items
are set for each port.
* :This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press [Port Select].
* :Current setting display is inverted.
3.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Precautions
These contents to set are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning the power off
and the settings are necessary when entering the maintenance mode.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-280
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
* :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be
changed.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).
6-281
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Modem setting
NCU setting
6-282
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6-283
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Displays/clears the MP tray feed counter
Cassette1 Displays/clears Cassette 1 count
Cassette2 Displays/clears Cassette 2 count
Cassette 3 *1 Displays Cassette 3 count
Cassette 4 *1 Displays Cassette 4 count
Cassette 5 Displays Cassette 5 count
Duplex Displays/clears the duplex unit count
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-284
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-285
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays/clears the service call counter.
Total Cnt Displays accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-286
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher
and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet
finisher and inner finisher.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the device to check.
* :Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Displays the document processor count.
DF *2 Displays the document finisher count.
Method: DP
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Displays the count of simultaneous duplex scanning
Method: DF
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Displays the sorter counter.
Staple Displays the staple counter.
Punch Displays the punch counter.
Stack *1 Displays the main tray eject counter.
Saddle *1 Displays the saddle eject counter.
Fold *1 Displays the center folding counter.
Three Fold *1 Displays the three folding counter.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-287
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after
repairing the parts.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Displays the total counter.
Purpose
Displays the total counter for check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the total count.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-288
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as
shown on the service status page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-289
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Displays the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Displays A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Displays B4 feed counts
A4 *1 Displays A4 feed counts
B5 *1 Displays B5 feed counts
A5 *1 Displays A5 feed counts
Folio *1 Displays Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Displays Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Displays Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Displays Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Displays Statement feed counts
ETC Displays Other paper feed counts.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-290
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB
memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit infor-
mation
Method
1.Turn the power switch off.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
* :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
4.Press the [Start] key.
5.Select the object item.
* :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or
written.
6-291
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00: toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-292
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to display.
* :Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions count
Items Contents
Col Copy (H) Color copy counts (Coverage: High)
Col Copy (M) Color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Copy (L) Color copy counts (Coverage: Low)
Mono Color Copy Displays mono color copy count.
B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.
Col Prn (H) Color print counts (Coverage: High)
Col Prn (M) Color print counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Prn (L) Color print counts (Coverage: Low)
B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX FAX count
Items Contents
Simplex Simplex print count is displayed
Duplex Duplex print count is displayed
Combine(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed
Combine(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed
Combine(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-293
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values
are 1000 or less.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-294
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :The main charge roller counter for each color is displayed.
Items Contents
C The current main charger roller count for C is displayed.
M The current main charger roller count for M is displayed.
Y The current main charger roller count for Y is displayed.
K The current main charger roller count for K is displayed.
Method: Clear
1.Select the item to set.
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-295
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Sets the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each
maintenance item individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to set.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export the maintenance log to a USB memory.
Setting: Setting
1.Select the item to set.
* :Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
U000-U019 Sets the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.
U020-U029 Sets the maintenance log output for U020 to U029.
U030-U059 Sets the maintenance log output for U030 to U059.
U060-U099 Sets the maintenance log output for U060 to U099.
U100-U129 Sets the maintenance log output for U100 to U129.
U130-U159 Sets the maintenance log output for U130 to U159.
U160-U199 Sets the maintenance log output for U160 to U199.
U200-U249 Sets the maintenance log output for U200 to U249.
U250-U349 Sets the maintenance log output for U250 to U349.
U400-U499 Sets the maintenance log output for U400 to U499.
U500-U599 Sets the maintenance log output for U500 to U599.
U600-U699 Sets the maintenance log output for U600 to U699.
U900-U999 Sets the maintenance log output for U900 to U999.
6-296
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
4.Press the [System Menu] key.
5.Select the item to adjust.
6.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-297
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB memory.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to execute.
* :The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Displays the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1.Select maintenance item number to execute.
2.Press the [Start] key.
* :Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance item U952.
5.Select [Execute(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
Method: Excute
1.Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
6-298
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Low-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464,469,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK-A 930,464,469,410,251
MK-B 930,464,469,410,251
MK-A MK-D 930,469,127,464,469,410,251
MK-B MK-E 930,464,469,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
High-end model
Items Contents
SET UP 464,469,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK-A 119,930,140,469,127,464,469,412,464,410,251
MK-B 119,930,140,464,469,412,464,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
Method: Entry(USB)
1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance item U952.
5.Select [Entry(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
8.Select [Execute].
* :Registers the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
6-299
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Method: Entry
1.Select [Entry].
2.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the
workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers
e.g.
When inserting a USB memory the following items can be registered: commands, texts and
maintenance numbers (variable).
File format: xxx.mwf
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-300
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Transfer the log files save in the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Turn the power switch on.
4.Enter maintenance item U952.
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Log retrieving starts when pressing three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job Cancel + Sys-
tem Menu/Counter + Stop) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error HDD to USB memory copy failure
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-301
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check the currently set toner area code and model code.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-302
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Displays the developer unit number.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit number.
M Displays the Magenta developer unit number.
Y Indicates the Yellow developer unit number.
K Displays the Black developer unit number.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-303
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Displays the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Select color to refer to.
Items Contents
C Displays the Cyan developer unit history.
M Displays the Magenta developer unit history.
Y Indicates the Yellow developer unit history.
K Displays the Black developer unit history.
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-304
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
Execute recovery of HDD management data error by turning the power off while accessing to the
HDD.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Contents
Displays the accumulated CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the CIS usage.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Displays the accumulated CIS lamp lighting time
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-305
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Contents
Displays the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
* :Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Displays times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Displays times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Displays times of other scan operations.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-306
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB (LSU)
Sending :
7-1
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-2
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-10) Moire
7-3
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-4
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-5
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-6
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-7
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-8
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-9
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-10
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-11
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image.
When scanning the second (back) side through the dual scan DP
7-12
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-13
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-14
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of the original
and copy.
When scanning the second (back) side through the dual scan DP
When scanning the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-15
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-16
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2-10) Moire
When scanning the second (back) side through the dual scan DP
7-17
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-18
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-19
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-20
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-21
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-22
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-23
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-24
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-25
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP
7-26
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-27
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-28
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-29
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-10) Moire
7-30
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-31
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-32
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-33
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-34
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-35
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Checking the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Function
Menu)
3 Checking the original The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
cover
4 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front]. U067 Exe-
incorrect. (The streaks or cution
bands appear out of the
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. cution
bands appear out of the
original.)
6 Checking the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and ISU Upper
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- Assy
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. Detach-
dirty. ment /
Reattach-
ment
7 Checking the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror of the mirror
units.
8 Checking the mirror units There is dust on the mirror Remove dust in the laser
units. path of the mirror units.
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
10 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the U063 Exe-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. cution
11 Replacing the ISU The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the ISU. ISU
Replace-
ment
12 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Engine
PWB
Replace-
ment
13 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Main PWB
Replace-
ment
7-36
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of the original
and copy.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
placed.(The original lead-
ing edge is not aligned to
the contact glass properly.)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. U066 Exe-
timing is incorrect cution
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
timing is incorrect A)]. cution
4 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Reattach the home position
tion sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
5 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the wire drums The attachment of the wire Re-tighten the screws for the Optical
drums is loose. wire drums. Wires
Replace-
ment
7 Checking the scanner The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
drive gear scanner drive gear is scanner drive gear.
loose.
7-37
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-38
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(3-10) Moire
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The original imaging qual- Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
ity is not properly set. tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
(Moire changes depend- [Common Settings] > [Func- (System
ing on the print quality.) tion Defaults]. Menu)
2 Checking the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
set. (Moire appears in the degrees and reset them.
original scanning direc-
tion.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scan- Change the value at U065 U065 Exe-
ning direction is large. [Main Scan] to reduce the cution
(This problem occurs when scanner magnification in the
the print ratio is set as main scanning direction.
100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
scanner section is incor- A)]. cution
rect
7-39
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-40
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-41
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-42
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-43
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-44
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-45
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-46
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
7-47
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-48
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-49
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
(4-1) The background is colored.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failure Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty. appears with the primary Transfer
transfer belt pitch (long Unit
period that spans between Replace-
the sheets), clean the primary ment
transfer belt. Then, replace
the primary transfer unit
when the imaging failure is
not cleared even after exe-
cuting Calibration or Color-
Calibration after cleaning.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary trans-
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. fer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the sec-
ondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure Second-
transfer roller unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary ary Trans-
transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
secondary transfer roller. Or, Unit
replace the secondary trans- Replace-
fer roller unit. ment
7-50
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-51
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-52
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-53
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-54
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-55
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-56
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-57
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-12) The irregular misalignment occurs between the leading edges of the original
and copy image. (Variation of paper leading edge timing)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge tim- U034 Exe-
not properly adjusted. ing at U034 [LSU Out Top]. cution
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount Execute U051 to adjust the U051 Exe-
before registration is paper loop amount before cution
improper. registration.
3 Checking the wire The wire of the paper feed Reconnect the wire of the
clutch, middle clutch or the paper feed clutch, middle
registration clutch is not clutch and the registration
properly connected, so it clutch.
does not operate smoothly.
4 Checking the clutch The paper feed clutch, Reattach the paper feed
middle clutch or the regis- clutch, middle clutch and the
tration clutch is not prop- registration clutch.
erly attached, so it does
not operate smoothly.
5 Replacing the paper feed The paper feed clutch, Replace the paper feed drive Feed Drive
drive unit middle clutch or the regis- unit. Unit
tration clutch is faulty, so it Replace-
does not operate smoothly. ment
7-58
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-59
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-60
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-61
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-62
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-63
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-64
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-20) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning the
first or second side through DP.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failure Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty or has appears with the primary Transfer
some scratches. transfer belt pitch (long Unit
period that spans between Replace-
the sheets), clean the primary ment
transfer belt. Then, replace
the primary transfer unit if the
imaging failure is not cleared.
2 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failures Second-
transfer roller unit roller is dirty or has some appear with the secondary ary Trans-
scratches. transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
secondary transfer roller. If Unit
not repaired, replace the sec- Replace-
ondary transfer roller unit. ment
3 Checking the feedshift The paper is hitting the Check the paper loop when
guide feedshift guide strongly. ejecting the paper, and reat-
tach the exit guide.
7-65
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-21) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image.
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the fuser unit The separation claws are Clean the separation claws.
dirty with toner.
2 Checking the fuser unit The paper separation plate Clean the paper separation
is dirty with toner. plate.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
properly set. the System Menu. MP Tray
Settings
4 Checking the feedshift There is toner dirt or weld- Clean the feedshift guide.
guide ing on the feedshift guide.
5 Checking the separation The separation brush is Clean the discharger brush
brush dirty with paper dust or by using the cleaning brush,
toner. etc.
6 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failure Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty or has appears with the primary Transfer
some scratches. transfer belt pitch (long Unit
period that spans between Replace-
the sheets), clean the primary ment
transfer belt. Then, replace
the primary transfer unit if the
imaging failure is not cleared.
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failures Second-
transfer roller unit roller is dirty, is deformed appear with the secondary ary Trans-
or is worn down. transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
secondary transfer roller. If Unit
not repaired, replace the sec- Replace-
ondary transfer roller unit. ment
8 Checking the cleaning pre- The primary transfer belt Clean the cleaning prebrush.
brush cannot be cleaned since
the cleaning prebrush is
dirty.
9 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Clean the primary transfer
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact smudges cleaning bias contact. Or,
tact or is deformed. correct its shape so that it is
securely grounded.
10 Replacing the transfer The cleaning bias is not Replace the transfer high- Transfer
high-voltage PWB generated from the trans- voltage PWB. High-volt-
fer high-voltage PWB. age PWB
Replace-
ment
7-66
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-67
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-68
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-69
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-70
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-71
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-72
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-73
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-74
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-75
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-76
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-77
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-78
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-79
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-80
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-81
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-13) The slight vertical black streaks appear at the both paper ends where are out
of the image area when using the SRA3 paper (paper width is 320mm).
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Executing Developer Toner outside the devel- As a relief measure, execute Developer
Refresh oper area width (311mm) Developer Refresh. Refresh
of the developer roller flies
to the drum and is trans-
ferred. As a result, it
appears as the slight black
streaks on both ends (out
of the image area) of the
SRA3 paper which is wider
than the developer area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the devel- Explain user that this issue is
oper area width (311mm) the vertical black streaks out
of the developer roller flies of the image area, and it the
to the drum and is trans- complete solution is difficult.
ferred. As a result, it (This issue cannot be com-
appears as the slight black pletely solved by the devel-
streaks on both ends (out oper unit
of the image area) of the replacement.)"SRA3
SRA3 paper which is wider (450x320mm) is the paper
than the developer area width that can print "Mark line
width. for aligning the image posi-
tion on the design work or for
cutting paper" on the paper
margin. The vertical black
streaks appear out of the
marking line that it is out of
the image area. Therefore,
this issue is not image failure,
and the actual use has no
problem."
7-82
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-83
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND-2
7-84
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-85
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feedshift guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
7-86
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
7-87
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the
paper curl
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet foreign objects or the burrs
is bent. on the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove
them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature U161 Exe-
fuser temperature is to the default value at U161 cution
improper. when the paper curls.
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feedshift
guide
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
remove the burrs on the parts
such as the guide or the actu-
ator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the separation
needles are dirty with toner or
paper dust, etc., clean them
with a dry cloth or a brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not prop- Check the guide, and remove
erly operate due to the any burrs. Also, if the guide
incorrect attachment or a does not operate smoothly
fault. manually, reattach the guide.
Then, replace the guide if it is
not fixed or if there is defor-
mation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not Execute U033 and check if U033 Exe-
operate properly. the guide can move smoothly cution
by the operation sounds. If
the guide does not operate
thoroughly or smoothly, reat-
tach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not
resolved.
7-88
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded
from the large capacity loaded. over the guide in the deck of
feeder) Checking the the large capacity paper
paper feeder, reload the paper so
the paper edge is not on the
corner of the deck.
7-89
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Cleaning the roller The roller is dirty. Check if the conveying rollers
or the pulleys have no paper
dust, toner, foreign objects,
diameter change or frictional
wear and clean their surface.
If they have a diameter
change or frictional wear,
replace the parts.
2 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- After checking if the relative U030/
ate properly. motors operate properly by U240/
executing U030 and U240, U032 Exe-
check the clutch operation at cution
U032. If the clutch does not
operate properly, go to the
next step. (If the motor opera-
tion is faulty, perform the
proper measures depending
on the jam code.)
3 Checking the clutch The clutch is not properly Check if the connector is
attached, is not properly securely connected to the
connected, or the foreign clutch, the clutch is properly
objects adhere on the attached, and there are no
clutch. foreign objects on the clutch.
Then, perform the proper
measures if necessary.
4 Replacing the clutch The clutch is faulty. If the clutch does not operate
properly after reattaching and
reconnecting, or if the clutch
is rusted, replace it. (Use the
individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.)
5 Checking the bushing The bushing is dirty. Clean the rollersshaftorthe-
bushingwhentheloadisap-
pliedtotherotationoftheconvey
ingrollersduetodirtonthem.'
6 Checking the spring The spring comes off. Check if the spring came off,
or if it adequately presses the
roller or the pulley, and reat-
tach it if necessary.
7-90
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-91
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette
are always damp.)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the paper stor- Papers have been stored Ask users to store paper in a
age place in the improper place. dry place.
2 Installing the cassette The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater Cassette
heater and set the mode by execut- Heater
ing U327. Installation
7-92
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
K
M
Q L
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
7-93
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
K M
Q
J
P Q
P O O
P
H
P
N F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 7-2
7-94
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
N N L
N
Q
N O
P G
N
A H
I
E C
Figure 7-3
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0000 - J4002 T J4302 V J4912 J J6200 P J7700 /
J0100 - J4003 T J4303 V J4913 J J6210 P J7710 /
7-95
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0101 - J4004 T J4304 V J4914 J J6300 P J7800 K
J0104 - J4005 / J4305 / J4915 / J6301 N J7810 K
J0105 - J4012 U J4309 V J4918 J J6310 P J7900 P
J0106 - J4013 U J4311 V J4919 J J6311 N J7901 N
J0107 - J4014 U J4312 V J5001 J J6400 / J7902 L
J0110 - J4015 / J4313 V J5002 J J6401 / J9000 /
J0111 - J4101 U J4314 V J5003 J J6402 / J9001 /
J0114 - J4102 U J4315 / J5004 J J6410 P J9002 /
J0212 - J4103 U J4319 V J5005 / J6411 N J9004 M
J0213 - J4104 U J4401 / J5008 J J6412 L J9005 /
J0300 - J4105 / J4402 / J5009 J J6500 / J9006 /
J0501 A J4108 U J4403 / J5011 J J6510 P J9007 /
J0502 B J4109 U J4404 / J5012 J J6511 N J9008 /
J0503 C J4111 J J4405 / J5013 J J6512 L J9009 M
J0504 D J4112 J J4409 / J5014 J J6600 / J9010 -
J0508 V J4113 J J4701 / J5015 / J6610 / J9011 -
J0509 G J4114 J J4702 / J5018 J J6710 / J9110 M
J0511 P J4115 / J4703 / J5019 J J6810 P J9200 M
J0512 T J4118 J J4704 / J6000 O J6811 N J9210 M
J0513 T J4119 J J4705 / J6001 N J6812 L J9300 M
J0514 T J4201 V J4709 / J6002 L J6910 P J9310 M
J0518 U J4202 V J4711 / J6012 - J6911 N J9400 M
J0519 U J4203 V J4712 / J6020 - J6912 L J9410 M
J0523 / J4204 V J4713 / J6021 - J7000 P J9600 M
J0524 / J4205 / J4714 / J6041 - J7001 N J9610 M
J0533 / J4208 / J4715 / J6050 / J7002 L
J0534 / J4209 V J4719 / J6060 / J7100 /
J0545 / J4211 J J4901 P J6070 / J7110 /
J0555 / J4212 J J4902 P J6080 / J7200 /
J1403 C J4213 J J4903 P J6100 D J7210 /
J1404 I J4214 J J4904 P J6101 N J7300 /
J1413 I J4215 / J4905 / J6102 L J7310 /
J1414 I J4218 J J4908 P J6110 P J7400 /
J1604 I J4219 J J4909 P J6111 N J7500 /
J1614 I J4301 V J4911 J J6112 L J7600 /
7-96
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-97
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-98
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-99
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-100
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-101
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-102
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-103
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-104
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-105
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-106
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-107
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-108
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-109
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-110
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-111
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-112
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-113
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-114
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-115
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-116
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-117
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-118
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-119
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-120
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-121
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-122
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-123
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-124
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-125
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-126
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-127
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-128
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-129
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-130
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-131
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-132
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-133
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-134
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-135
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-136
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-137
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-138
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-139
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-140
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-141
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-142
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-143
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-144
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-145
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-146
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-147
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-148
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-149
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-150
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-151
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-152
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-153
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-154
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-155
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-156
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-157
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-158
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-159
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-160
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-161
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-162
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
J6500: DF eject paper sensor non-arrival jam when ejecting the paper stack
Object: 4000-sheet finisher
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF middle sensor turned
on during the paper stack ejection.
7-163
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF eject paper sensor stay jam when ejecting the paper stack
Object: J6510 (4000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1000-sheet finisher), J6512 (Inner
finisher)
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn off after starting the paper stack eject.
7-164
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-165
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
Object: 4000-sheet finisher
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on when conveying the
paper to the folding unit.
7-166
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-167
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-168
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-169
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-170
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-171
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-172
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-173
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-174
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-175
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-176
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-177
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-178
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-179
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-180
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-181
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-182
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-183
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-184
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-185
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-186
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-187
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-188
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-189
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-190
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-191
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-192
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-193
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-194
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-195
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-196
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-197
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-198
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-199
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-200
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-201
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-202
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-203
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
*: * Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the
power switch off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct ser-
vice until the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)
7-204
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-205
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-206
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-207
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-208
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-209
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-210
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-211
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-212
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-213
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-214
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
7-215
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.
7-216
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-217
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-218
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-219
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-220
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-221
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-222
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-223
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-224
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-225
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-226
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-227
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-228
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-229
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-230
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-231
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-232
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-233
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-234
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-235
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-236
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-237
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-238
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-239
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-240
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-241
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-242
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-243
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-244
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-245
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-246
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-247
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-248
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-249
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-250
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-251
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-252
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-253
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-254
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-255
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-256
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-257
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-258
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-259
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-260
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-261
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-262
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-263
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-264
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-265
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-266
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-267
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-268
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-269
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-270
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
to the paper jam processing mode, the fuser release motor is stopped but the service call error does not
appear if it is in between the stop position and the position in front of the stop position by 500ms.)
7-271
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-272
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-273
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-274
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-275
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-276
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-277
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
the data.2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.3. The reading data and the writing
data mismatch 8 times continuously.
7-278
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-279
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-280
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-281
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-282
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-283
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-284
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-285
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-286
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-287
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-288
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-289
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-290
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-291
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-292
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-293
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-294
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-295
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-296
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-297
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-298
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-299
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-300
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-301
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-302
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-303
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-304
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-305
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-306
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-307
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-308
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-309
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-310
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-311
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-312
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-313
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-314
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-315
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-316
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-317
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-318
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-319
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-320
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-321
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-322
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-323
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-324
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-325
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-326
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-327
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-328
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-329
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-330
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-331
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-332
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-333
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-334
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-335
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-336
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-337
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-338
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-339
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-340
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-341
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-342
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-343
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-344
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
*: Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
- Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing and reinserting the DIMM.
If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
7-345
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-346
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-347
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-348
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-349
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-350
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-351
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-352
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-353
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-354
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-355
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card.
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D
(10) FAX cannot be sent.
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished.
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data.
7-356
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-357
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-358
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(1-9) F14D
An error in the FAX control section is detected.
7-359
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-360
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-361
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Figure 7-1
7-362
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-363
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-364
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-365
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00100/E00100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted by a press of the
stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the FAX Oper-
by a press of the [Stop] destination unit or request the ation
key. destination unit to resend the Guide
data.
U00300/E00300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers. ation
during transmission. Guide
7-366
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00430/E00430
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted FAX Oper-
number letin board transmission number ation
were requested, but the Guide
communication was inter-
rupted because the permit-
ted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting
unit.)
U00431/E00431
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit board transmission was password in the destination ation
interrupted because the unit. Guide
specified sub address
password was not regis-
tered.
U00432/E00432
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub FAX Oper-
password board transmission was address password. ation
interrupted because the Guide
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address FAX Oper-
box board transmission box. ation
request was received but Guide
data was notpresent in the
sub address box.
7-367
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00440/E00440
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address FAX Oper-
password reception was interrupted password. ation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The reception was inter- Register the permitted num- FAX Oper-
number rupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ation
ted ID and FAX number did machine side. Guide
not match in the restricted
transmission (password
check transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because number. ation
the specified encryption Guide
box number was not regis-
tered.
U00462/E00462
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX Oper-
key interrupted because the ation
encryption key for the Guide
specifiedencryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length Check if the original length
exceeds the maximum does not exceed 1.6 meter
allowed. and resend.
7-368
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00613/E00613
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error Event Log
error record record and perform the cor- Report
rective actions. Output
U00656/E00656
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted because there was
an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was inter- Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX rupted because there was pull out the power plug. After
PWB an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
3 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Upgrade
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
changed. FAX. cution
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
U00690/E00690
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective System
error unit actions for the system error in Error List
the main unit.
7-369
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U00800/E00800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not prop- U630 Exe-
speed occurred because of erly sent and resending does cution
reception of a RTN or PIN not solve it, reduce transmit
signal. start speed and resend the
data.
U00811/E00811
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not prop- U630 Exe-
remained after retry of erly sent and resending does cution
transmission in the ECM not solve it, reduce transmit
mode. start speed and resend the
data.
U00900/E00900
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted prop-
page reception error. erly.
U01000/E01000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-370
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01001/E01001
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01016/E01016
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01019/E01019
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-371
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01020/E01020
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CTC signal.
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01021/E01021
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending EOR•Q sig-
nal. (ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01022/E01022
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending RR signal.
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-372
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01028/E01028
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01052/E01052
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01080/E01080
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-373
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01092/E01092
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01093/E01093
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection U650 Exe-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mdm cution
received signal is attenu- Level]. (Initial setting: -
ated with its frequency 43dBm)
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
received signal is attenu- RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01094/E01094
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during transmis-
sion.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-374
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01096/E01096
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid com- Resend.
mand is received at phase
D during transmission.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01097/E01097
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The preset number of com- Resend.
mand retransfers was
exceeded after transmis-
sion of an RRsignal or no
response.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01100/E01100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request resending.
signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-375
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01101/E01101
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request resending.
signal except communica-
tion type is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01102/E01102
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request resending.
received while own
machine has no transmis-
sion data.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01110/E01110
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending DIS signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01111/E01111
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending DTC (NSC)
signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-376
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01113/E01113
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection U650 Exe-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mdm cution
received signal is attenu- Level]. (Initial setting: -
ated with its frequency 43dBm)
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
received signal is attenu- RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
ated with its frequency 0dBm)
response.
U01125/E01125
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending CNS signal.
(between own machine)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01129/E01129
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending No response after trans- Request resending.
mitting an SPA signal.
(Short protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01141/E01141
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending DTC signal.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-377
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01143/E01143
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
after sending FTT signal. equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
0dBm)
U01155/E01155
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending SPA signal.
(simplified protocol)
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01160/E01160
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01162/E01162
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-378
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01191/E01191
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request resending.
with error during image
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01193/E01193
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time in U641 Exe-
or invalid command is U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. cution
received at phase C/D dur- (Change from the initial set-
ing reception. ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures U630 Exe-
for echoes at the reception in cution
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set-
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting U630 Exe-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. cution
U01194/E01194
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request resending.
phase B during reception.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-379
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01195/E01195
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in U641 Exe-
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. cution
(Change from the initial set-
ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures U630 Exe-
for echoes at the reception in cution
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set-
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting U630 Exe-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. cution
U01196/E01196
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages dur-
ing reception.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01400/E01400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" Delete "#" from the registered FAX Oper-
number on the phone numbers of numbers if "#" exists in ation
the destination unit, so it is advance of "x" on the phone Guide
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed the poor condition. reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of U630 Exe-
speed condition is poor and an the transmit start speed by cution
error frequently occurs. executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-380
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01600/E01600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit U630 Exe-
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after low- cution
error frequently occurs. ering the reception start
speed.
U01700/E01700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01720/E01720
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
7-381
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01721/E01721
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there
is no communication
speed commonly used
with the destination unit.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].
U01800/E01800
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01810/E01810
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
7-382
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U01820/E01820
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U01821/E01821
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication reducing the transmit start
speed commonly used speed.
with the destination unit.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].
U03000/E03000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination No document was present Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit in the destination unit to set the originals. ation
when polling reception Guide
started.
U03200/E03200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit address box in the main to store the original data in ation
unit that are specified from the sub address box. Guide
the destination unit.
7-383
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U03300/E03300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the ation
destination unit are incor- own FAX number as the per- Guide
rect. mitted ID and the permitted
FAX number.
U03400/E03400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03500/E03500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after input- FAX Oper-
unit reception was interrupted ting the sub address pass- ation
because the specified sub word registered in the Guide
address password did not destination unit.
match.
7-384
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U03700/E03700
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the Destination machine has Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin ation
board communication board communication func- Guide
function or no originals are tion. If available, request the
stored in any original deliv- destination unit to save the
ery box (sub address box). original data in the sub
address box.
U04000/E04000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The original was transmit- Register the sub address FAX Oper-
destination unit ted to the sub address box, password in the destination ation
but the specified box was unit. Guide
not registered in the desti-
nation unit that is our own
model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was transmit- Match the sub address in the FAX Oper-
of the FAX transmission ted to the sub address box FAX forward condition ation
condition in the destination unit that Guide
is our own model, but the
sub address of the trans-
mission condition did not
match.
U04100/E04100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The destination unit had no Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
destination unit sub address reception to the reception function in ation
capability while the sub the destination unit. Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box. ation
box was not registered in Guide
the destination unit.
7-385
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U04300/E04300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The encryption transmis- Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
destination unit sion was carried out, but to the reception function in ation
there is no encryption func- the destination unit. Guide
tion at the other machine.
U04400/E04400
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U05100/E05100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the FAX Oper-
number interrupted because the authorization number that ation
permitted ID and FAX has been registered. Guide
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check transmis-
sion).
U05200/E05200
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted recep- FAX Oper-
match a permitted FAX tion settings. ation
number / ID, or it matches Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the setting in the The own telephone num- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit ber is not informed from to register the own telephone ation
the destination unit. number. Guide
7-386
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U05300/E05300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the setting in the The number does not Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
destination unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted recep- ation
number / ID, or it matches tion settings. Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the settings The main unit did not Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone ation
number in question . number. Guide
U14000/E14000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Release memory by printing
box was interrupted due to originals stored in memory or
memory overflow in its cancel FAX box reception.
unit.
U14100/E14100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the destination Transmission was inter- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit rupted due to the memory to release memory. ation
overflow in the destination Guide
unit when transmitting into
the sub address box.
U19000/E19000
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Checking the memory The reception was inter- Release memory by printing
rupted due to the memory originals stored in memory.
overflow in the main unit
during memory reception.
7-387
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
U19100/E19100
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
PWB is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
U19300/E19300
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
PWB is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
3 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Upgrade
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
changed. FAX. cution
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
7-388
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security soft-
ware settings.
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent.
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent.
7-389
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-390
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-391
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-392
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-393
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-394
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-395
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-396
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-397
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-398
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-399
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-400
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-401
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-402
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-403
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-404
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-405
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-406
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2) The data is output with color from Excel even if the monochrome mode is set.
7-407
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-408
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-409
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-410
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(10)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated
on the printer properties.
The main unit is not ready to print
7-411
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is
indicated.
The main unit locks up.
(12)Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup
error.Processing/Memory lamp is turned on.
The main unit locks up.
(13)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up. Processing and Memory
lamps on operation panel are lit.
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.
7-412
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-413
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-414
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-415
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-416
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-417
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-418
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-419
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-420
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears.
(2) F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
(3) F010: Program read error (SSD)
(4) F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
(5) F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
(6) F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the
controller and the print engine)
(7) F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
(8) F050: Engine main program error
(9) F051: Scanner engine program error
(10) F052: Panel engine program error
(11) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover.
(12) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray.
(13) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover.
7-421
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(2) F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel
main PWB is unavailable.
7-422
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4) F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.
7-423
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5) F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the ASIC when the main unit starts up.
(6) F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication
error between the controller and the print engine)
The communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB is not normal.
7-424
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(7) F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
The communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (scanner) is not normal.
7-425
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-426
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(11)The cover open message appears after closing the front cover.
7-427
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(12)The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray.
7-428
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(13)The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover.
7-429
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-430
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-431
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-432
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-433
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
(9) Abnormal noise from the lower side than the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion
(10)Abnormal noise from the upper side of the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the fuser eject pulley and the shaft due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion
7-434
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-435
2L7/2RL/2RM/2RN/2ND
7-436
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the communication line with ASIC is not connected, communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs.
error *D rank) ation *Refer to Remarks (2) Since the machine front side of ID sensor signal line is shut off, C7601 error (D
rank) occurs
(3) Since the power is not supplied the sensor which detects to the cassette open/
close, the cassette open/close can be detected.
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and C call, but (1) Since the communication line with ASIC is not connected, communication error
communication error) error) abnormal operation *Refer to occurs
Remarks (2) Since the power line of IH power control signal is shut off, IH lower power error
occurs
(3) Since the drum heater power line is shut off, drum heater is not activated. Since
eraser power line is shut off, density reduction occurs while being unable to discharge
drum
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor C2203 (Drum motor Color (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) error) error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the polygon motor control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
gon motor synchronization call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) Since the Magenta image signal is shut off, abnormal Y images are output.
error) image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Since the K image signal line is shut off, abnormal K images are output.
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
weight detection sensor (2) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
YC16 DP, sensor, drive motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(2) Since power to the carriage position sensor is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(3) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off, no communication is
call error call error established and AFE error occurs.
YC34 Transfer High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer high voltage control signal is shut off and images become faint with-
call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal out transfer
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Transfer belt cleaning high voltage control signal is shut off and cleaning failure
occurs
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The main charge and developer high voltage control signal is shut off and blank
call error, but abnormal call error call error, but abnormal pages are output
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) A developer control signal is disconnected and images become faint
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
7-437
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation *Refer to Remarks LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
*Refer to Remarks
YC4 Fiery Relay PWB
Feed YC6 Engine PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
image communication error) error) call error occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated. Eraser
power is shut off and image density is lowered while being unable to discharge drum
YC28 Engine PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2203 (Drum motor Color C2760 (Transfer belt motor (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is shut off and communication error
error) error) error) occurs
(2) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC29 Feed Drive PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C7980(Waste toner over- No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) flow)*Refer to Remarks for call error (2) The waste toner sensor control signal is shut off and waste toner overflow occurs
occurrence condition
YC32 The middle transfer belt, fuser C1950(Middle transfer belt No occur JAM and service "Main unit cover is open" the (1) The communication line with the primary transfer EEPROM is shut off and com-
high voltage PWB, container unit EEPROM error) call error, but abnormal oper- front cover open is displayed. munication error occurs
solenoid ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The Yellow toner container cover open/close control signal is shut off and the
cover is not opened at Yellow toner empty
(3) The front cover open/close sensor signal is shut of and constant cover open
occurs
YC33 IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH C6920(IH coil cooling fan C6920(IH coil cooling fan No occur JAM and service (1) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
fan motor error) error) call error (2) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
YC17 Ejection motor, sensor for C7901 (Drum K EEPROM When printing, JAM470x When printing, JAM430x (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
conveying, drum developer error) (Switch-back sensor non- (Duplex sensor non-arrival x: error occurs
relay PWB arrival x: differ by cassette differ by cassette) (2) The signal of the sensor on the paper conveying path is shut off and jam is
detected while being unable to detect paper
(3) The switch-back motor control signal is shut off at duplex printing and no paper is
switched. Then, jam is detected.
YC12 RFID PWB C7320(Toner container No occur JAM and service C7320(Toner container (1) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
detection connector error) call error, but abnormal oper- detection connector error) (2) The power line to the PWB to communicate the toner container is shut off and the
ation *Refer to Remarks toner container indication disappears from the operation panel while being unable to
detect the toner container
(3) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
YC36 Container motor When supplying the toner, When supplying the toner, No occur JAM and service (1) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
C7001(container stir motor C7001(container stir motor call error (2) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
error) error) (3) As the signal which controls the turn direction of the container motor is shut off,
the turn direction is fixed, but toner supply error doesn't occur since turns to the direc-
tion which supplies all the four toners.
7-438
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC24 Drum motor, Developer motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- When printing, C2103(Devel- C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the control signal to the drum motor K is shut off, motor error occurs.
image state error) oper motor Color error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer color motor is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the control signal to the drum motor K is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC23 Sensor, belt separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) Since the control signal to the motor which controls primary and secondary trans-
ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release fer pressure is shut off, pressure error occurs.
error) error) error) (2) Since the control signal to the motor which controls primary and secondary trans-
fer pressure is shut off, pressure error occurs.
(3) Since the signal to the sensor which detects primary and secondary transfer pres-
sure position is shut off, pressure error occurs.
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7302(Hop- (1) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs.
per motor K error) per motor K error) per motor C error) (2) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs.
(3) The hopper motor C control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and blank pages are output
Main High Voltage PWB call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal call error (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks transfer
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB sensor, thermistor C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Breaking detection on No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
error) fuser thermistor) call error error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) Since the signal which detects AK connection is shut off, controls while judging no
message is displayed. ation *Refer to Remarks ation *Refer to Remarks AK ? In case of no AK, though the parts which attached to the eject section turns on
the sensor there,as they are taken off when AK is installed, the mismatch occurs,
inner tray mis-detection occurs.
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Feed drive No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
call error, but abnormal oper- (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
ation *Refer to Remarks occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation *Refer to Remarks error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
7-439
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
drive motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 *Refer while detecting paper at power-up
to Remarks (2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position
the MPF paper feeding, (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and motor
C1000 (MPF lift motor error). error occurs when feeding from MPF
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs
error) (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) error) (2) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The feed motor rotation direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the
reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) Since the cassette paper size sensor is shut off, the size cannot be detected.
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Since the sensor signal which detects Cassette 1 open/close sensor is shut off,
which the error doesn't occur. the lift-up operation is not executed without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-440
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Main YC42 Lower voltage power source The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
PWB activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No The error doesn't occur. * but (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the CF000 occurs when recover- (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. ing from the sleep mode. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
7-441
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-442
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No Occur JAM and service No Occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs
error *D rank) ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and no cassette open/
close can be detected
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power It doesn't occur JAM and C (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) error) call, but abnormal operation occurs
*Refer to Remarks (2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor C2203 (Drum motor Color (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) error) error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) Since the polygon motor control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
gon motor synchronization call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) Since the Magenta image signal is shut off, abnormal M images are output.
error) image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Since the K image signal line is shut off, abnormal K images are output.
YC10 APC PWB When printing, C4101(BD When printing, C4101(BD No occur JAM and service (1) BD emitting signal is shut off and BD error occurs
signal initialization error) signal initialization error) call error, but abnormal (2) The BD emitting control signal is shut off and BD error occurs
image output *Refer to (3) The Cyan image signal is shut off and abnormal C images are output
Remarks
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
weight detection sensor (2) Since the 24V power output permission signal to low voltage PWB is shut off, 24V
power is not generated and 24V power error occurs.
YC16 DP, sensor, scanner motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(2) Since power to the carriage position sensor is shut off, carriage error occurs.
(3) Since the carriage drive motor control signal is shut off, carriage error occurs.
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off and no communication is estab-
call error call error lished to cause AFE error
YC34 Main High Voltage PWB, C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service C5104 (Main high voltage Y (1) Since Yellow output monitor signal is shut off, Yellow high voltage error occurs.
Transfer high Voltage PWB error) call error, but abnormal error) (2) Since the high voltage BK control signal is shut off, K images are not output.
image *Refer to Remarks (3) Since Yellow output monitor signal is shut off, Yellow high voltage error occurs.
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) A Y charge control signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
error) call error call error, but abnormal (3) A high voltage control signal is disconnected and images become faint
image *Refer to Remarks
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
7-443
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation *Refer to Remarks LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
*Refer to Remarks
YC4 Fiery Relay PWB
Feed YC6 Engine PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
image communication error) error) call error occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC28 Engine PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2203 (Drum motor Color C2760 (Transfer belt motor (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) error) error occurs
(2) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC29 Feed Drive PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C7980(Waste toner over- C7470(Toner sucking fan (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) flow)*Refer to Remarks for error) (2) The waste toner sensor control signal is shut off and waste toner overflow occurs
occurrence condition (3) The toner sucking fan control signal is shut off and C7470 error occurs
YC32 The middle transfer belt, fuser C1950(Middle transfer belt No occur JAM and service "Main unit cover is open" the (1) The communication line with the primary transfer EEPROM is shut off and com-
high voltage PWB, container unit EEPROM error) call error, but abnormal oper- front cover open is displayed. munication error occurs
solenoid ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The Yellow toner container cover open/close control signal is shut off and the
cover is not opened at Yellow toner empty (3) The front cover open/close sensor sig-
nal is shut of and constant cover open occurs
YC33 IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH C6920(IH coil cooling fan C6920(IH coil cooling fan No occur JAM and service (1) Since ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off, FAN error occurs.
fan motor error) error) call error (2) Since ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off, FAN error occurs.
(3) Since the IH PWB fan control signal is shut off, fan is not driven.
YC17 Ejection motor, sensor for C7901 (Drum K EEPROM When printing, JAM470x When printing, JAM430x (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
conveying, drum developer error) (Switch-back sensor non- (Duplex sensor non-arrival x: error occurs
relay PWB arrival x: differ by cassette differ by cassette) (2) The signal of the sensor on the paper conveying path is shut off and jam is
detected while being unable to detect paper
(3) The switch-back motor control signal is shut off at duplex printing and no paper is
switched. Then, jam is detected.
YC12 RFID PWB C7320(Toner container No occur JAM and service C7320(Toner container (1) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
detection connector error) call error, but abnormal oper- detection connector error) (2) The power line to the PWB to communicate the toner container is shut off and the
ation *Refer to Remarks toner container indication disappears from the operation panel while being unable to
detect the toner container
(3) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
YC36 Container motor When supplying the toner, When supplying the toner, No occur JAM and service (1) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
C7001(container stir motor C7001(container stir motor call error (2) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
error) error) (3) As the signal which controls the turn direction of the container motor is shut off,
the turn direction is fixed, but toner supply error doesn't occur since turns to the direc-
tion which supplies all the four toners.
7-444
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC24 Drum motor, Developer motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- When printing, C2103(Devel- C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the drum motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs
image state error) oper motor Color error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer color motor is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the drum motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC23 Sensor, belt separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) The primary and secondary transfer pressure motor control signal is shut off and
ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release pressure error occurs
error) error) error) (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and pres-
sure error occurs
(3) The primary and secondary transfer pressure sensor control signal is shut off and
pressure error occurs
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7302(Hop- (1) Since the hopper motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
per motor K error) per motor K error) per motor C error) (2) Since the hopper motor K control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
(3) Since the hopper motor C control signal is shut off, motor error occurs.
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, C5104 (Main high voltage Y No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and high voltage error occurs
Main High Voltage PWB error) call error, but abnormal call error (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image *Refer to Remarks transfer
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB, sensor, thermis- C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Broken upper fuser No jam and service call error (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
tor error) thermistor detection) error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) AK detection signal is shut off and control is turned off while judging no AK. The
message is displayed. ation *Refer to Remarks ation *Refer to Remarks part attached to the eject section turns on the sensor there when no AK is installed
but it is turned off to cause mismatch when AK is installed and inner tray mis-detec-
tion occurs
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Main PWB No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off,
call error, but abnormal oper- communication error causes to be finisher separation state. Not entering into Finisher
ation *Refer to Remarks but staying between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
YC37 Developer motor C2102(Developer motor CY No occur JAM and service C2102(Developer motor CY (1) The developer motor YC control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) call error error) (3) The developer motor YC control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation *Refer to Remarks error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
7-445
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Feed YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
drive motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 *Refer while detecting paper at power-up
to Remarks (2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off
the MPF paper feeding, and motor error occurs when feeding from MPF
C1000 (MPF lift motor error).
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
error)
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs (2) The feed
error) error) motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs (3) The feed motor rotation
direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) The cassette paper size sensor is shut off and size cannot be detected
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Cassette 1 open/close sensor signal is shut off and the lift-up operation is not exe-
which the error doesn't occur. cuted without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-446
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Main YC42 Power Source PWB The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No No error has occurred (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC2 HDD
YC32 HDD
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
7-447
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
7-448
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB (High-end model)
(1) Main PWB (High-end model)
(1-1) Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
8-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1
YC38
A11 A12
A16 4 5
1 YC43 A1 A1 B1
14 1 YS1
1 YC6
YC35 A1
B12
YC42 A20
B1
5
60
YC31
1 18
YC40
B20 A1
20 20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1
1 1
6 1
A15 A1 YC22
YC9 YC10 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 40 1 41 1 17 B1 B15 1 12
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
8-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
8-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8
8-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-46
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-47
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-48
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
1 20
YC14
8
Figure 8-9
Figure 8-10
8-49
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-50
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-51
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-52
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-53
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6
YC3
1 1
YC1 YC2
20
1 17
Figure 8-11
Figure 8-12
8-54
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-55
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-56
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 13
YC1
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14
8-57
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-58
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-15
Figure 8-16
8-59
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(220-240V)
Figure 8-17
8-60
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-61
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-62
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-63
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-18
Figure 8-19
8-64
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-65
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-66
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-67
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-68
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-69
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC5 YC6
1
Figure 8-20
Figure 8-21
(220-240V)
Figure 8-22
8-70
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-71
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
13 YC2 1
YC51 1
52
1
YC33
10
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-23
Figure 8-24
8-72
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-73
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-74
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-75
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-76
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-77
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-78
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-79
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-80
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-81
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
5
60 YC31 18
1
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC4 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 50 1 41 1 17 1 11 1 12
Figure 8-25
Figure 8-26
8-82
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-83
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-84
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-85
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-86
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-87
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-88
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-89
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-90
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-91
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-92
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-93
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-94
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-95
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-96
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-97
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A9 A1
YC19
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-27
Figure 8-28
8-98
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
8-99
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-100
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-101
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-102
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-103
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-104
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-105
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-106
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-107
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-108
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-109
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-110
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
B1 YC2
A17
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-29
Figure 8-30
8-111
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-112
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-113
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-114
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-115
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-116
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-117
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
Figure 8-31
Figure 8-32
8-118
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-119
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-120
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-121
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-122
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
YC2 1
17
YC1
1
Figure 8-33
Figure 8-34
8-123
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-124
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-125
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 13
YC1
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36
8-126
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-127
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
12 8
1 2 1 1 2
3 1 YC8 1 4 1
YC2 YC9 YC7 YC6 YC5
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-37
Figure 8-38
8-128
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(220-240V)
Figure 8-39
8-129
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-130
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-131
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-132
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-40
Figure 8-41
8-133
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-134
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-135
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-136
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
8-137
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-138
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC5 YC6
1
Figure 8-42
Figure 8-43
(220-240V)
Figure 8-44
8-139
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-140
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-45
Figure 8-46
8-141
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-142
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-143
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-144
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-145
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-47
Figure 8-48
8-146
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-147
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-148
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-149
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-150
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1 YC15 1
2
YC2 19
4
1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
Figure 8-49
Figure 8-50
8-151
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-152
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-153
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-154
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
5 1
5 YC11
16 YC2
YC1
1 12
YC3
4
1 YC12
4
1
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
Figure 8-51
Figure 8-52
8-155
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-156
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-157
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-158
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-159
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3
1 YC6
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC3 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4 1
14 B1 1 3
1
B13
YC8
Figure 8-53
Figure 8-54
8-160
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-161
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-162
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-163
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-164
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
7
YC2
1
YC1
1 40
Figure 8-55
Figure 8-56
8-165
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-166
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-167
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 3 1 3 1 4 1 3 1 15
5 YC12 1 YC3 YC2 YC4 YC6 YC5
1
YC11
5
YS11
YC1
16
1 3 1 4 1 8
YC7 YC8 YC9
Figure 8-57
Figure 8-58
8-168
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-169
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-170
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-171
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 12 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC15 YC10
9
1 YC6
1 5
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 4 1
Figure 8-59
Figure 8-60
8-172
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-173
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-174
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-175
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 2
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 1
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS1: On/Off
SIG
8-176
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-177
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
1 4
3 YC4
YC1
YC5
1 5
1
YC3 1 1
YC2
3
Figure 8-61
8-178
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-179
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-180
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
11 1
1 18
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
1
5
YC1
1
8
YC12
YC2
1
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
5 1
YC3 YC7
7 1
YC9
1
19 1
YC11 8 1
Figure 8-62
Figure 8-63
8-181
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-182
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-183
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
8-184
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
2B
2 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
1B
3 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
2A
4 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
1A
5 SFT R MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
6 SFT R MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
7 SFT R MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
8 SFT R MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
9 SFT F MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
10 SFT F MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
11 SFT F MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
12 SFT F MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
13 EJECT CL O DC0V/24V Eject clutch: On/Off
14 24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
8-185
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-186
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-187
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-188
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-189
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-190
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC1
YC7 1
13 1
5 1
YC2
20
11
YC6
1 7
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
Figure 8-64
8-191
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-192
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-193
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
30 1 5 YC2 1 5 YC1 1
16
15 YC20 YC18 YC8
1 1
9
1
1 1
YC5
YC7 4
YC11 7
12
1
12
YC3
4
7
1
YC16 YC19
7
1
1
YC4
6 2
1
YC15 YC9
2
1
10 YC13 1
20
Figure 8-65
8-194
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-195
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-196
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-197
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-198
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
Figure 8-66
Figure 8-67
8-199
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-200
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-201
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 13 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1 1
YC15 YC10
9 YC12
1 YC6
1 5 6
YC14 12
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 6 1
Figure 8-68
Figure 8-69
8-202
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-203
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-204
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-205
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-206
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-207
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
8-208
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes
(1) Repetitive defects gauge
9-1
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter-
values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the
FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command.
(!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
FRPO parameters
9-2
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-3
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-4
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-5
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-6
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-7
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-8
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-9
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-10
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
9-11
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000005), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Using DP: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Magnificaiton Copy: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
MTF correction
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Input gamma in color mode
Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Color correction matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the fol- Using DP: 2.5mm or less
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
*:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
positioned against the original. 1.5mm/100mm or less(document processor)
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
*:Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as follows. ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
5 mm Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
149 ± 1 mm
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
74 ± 1 mm
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the specified original, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original the following adjustments are automatically made: (refer to P.6-205)
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
9-12
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 2 Relay 1 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner suction fan motor GND
24V
2
3
Relay 2
1
13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
2 2
Vibration motor BK 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor M 1 1 Feed image PWB (1/6)
2 2
Vibration motor C 1 1
2 2
Vibration motor Y 1 1
Main drive
9-13
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K
GND 3 3 3 3 GND DP main PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K YC6
15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P2 14 14 14 14 P2
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
DATAP4_K 18 18 18 18 DATAP4_K
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAN4_K 19 19 19 19 DATAN4_K
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
DATAP3_K 21 21 21 21 DATAP3_K
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAN3_K 22 22 22 22 DATAN3_K
GND
SD_CLK
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
GND
SD_CLK
DP
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM BD 3 3 2 2 BD A16 A16 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC NC 2 2 3 3 NC PD PWB A15 A15
Relay A14
GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A14 3.3V2
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
CS0_KM 38 38 38 38 CS0_KM PGND 2 2 4 4 PGND
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_M 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_M
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V2
DATAN2_M
GND
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
DATAN2_M
GND
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK Original detection sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6 B/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAP4_M 46 46 46 46 DATAP4_M CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
B 3 4 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
DATAN4_M
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN4_M
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor Scanner motor A 4 3 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
DATAP3_M 49 49 49 49 DATAP3_M 2 A1 A1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M A/ 6 1
YC7
YC10 YC2
TH 1 1 2 2 TH
GND 1 1 1 1 GND
DATAP4_C 2 2 2 2 DATAP4_C
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DATAN4_C 3 3 3 3 DATAN4_C
GND 4 4 4 4 GND
DATAP3_C 5 5 5 5 DATAP3_C YC1 YC36
DATAN3_C 6 6 6 6 DATAN3_C +12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
GND 7 7 7 7 GND +12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
DATAP2_C 8 8 8 8 DATAP2_C +12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
DATAN2_C 9 9 9 9 DATAN2_C +12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
GND 10 10 10 10 GND NC 36 36 5 5 NC
DATAP1_C 11 11 11 11 DATAP1_C LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
DATAN1_C 12 12 12 12 DATAN1_C GND 34 34 7 7 GND
GND 13 13 13 13 GND DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
INT_ST_YC 14 14 14 14 INT_ST_YC DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
SET_YC 15 15 15 15 SET_YC GND 31 31 10 10 GND
CSI_C 16 16 16 16 CSI_C DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
DIO_YC 18 18 18 18 DIO_YC GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 19 19 19 19 GND DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DOI_YC 20 20 20 20 DOI_YC DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
GND 21 21 21 21 GND GND 25 25 16 16 GND
SKOI_YC 22 22 22 22 SKOI_YC DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
CSO_YC 24 24 24 24 CSO_YC GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 25 25 25 25 GND DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DATAP4_Y 26 26 26 26 DATAP4_Y DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
DATAN4_Y 27 27 27 27 DATAN4_Y GND 19 19 22 22 GND
GND 28 28 28 28 GND DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DATAP3_Y 29 29 29 29 DATAP3_Y DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
DATAN3_Y 30 30 30 30 DATAN3_Y GND 16 16 25 25 GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
DATAP2_Y 32 32 32 32 DATAP2_Y GND 14 14 27 27 GND
DATAN2_Y 33 33 33 33 DATAN2_Y AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
GND 34 34 34 34 GND GND 12 12 29 29 GND
DATAP1_Y 35 35 35 35 DATAP1_Y AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
DATAN1_Y 36 36 36 36 DATAN1_Y GND 10 10 31 31 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
CSI_Y 38 38 38 38 CSI_Y GND 8 8 33 33 GND
P4_YC
BD
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
P4_YC
BD
APC PWB AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
YC27 YC3
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 5 5 GND
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
PGND
7
8
7
8
2
1
2
1
+24V4
PGND Laser scanner unit YC1 YC2
㸦4 beam㸧 +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED PWB LED_PWM
LED_ENA
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
LED_PWM
LED_ENABLE
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND
2 2 Waste toner motor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
Relay
4 4 TH
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT Weight detection CCD PWB
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V sensor
9-14
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB B5 B5 CW/CCW
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
B 2 3 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
IH core motor A 3
Relay
2 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
Eject unit 1
2
12
11
3 10
4 9 YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Eject reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor lower GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor upper GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Eject/IH fan motor front
YC1
VIB_MOT_REM 20 20 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH fan motor center
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12 3 1 24V
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum-Developer TPC_Y 11 11 B10 B10 TPC_Y
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH fan motor rear
1 3 ALM
TPC_C 10 10 B11 B11 TPC_C
relay PWB (1/2) TPC_M
TPC_BK
9
8
9
8
B12
B13
B12
B13
TPC_M
TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-15
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor BK
6 6 CONT_RECOG
3.3V2 A6 A6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_BK A7 A7 3 7 Emitter
THOP_LED_BK A8 A8 2 8 Cathode
YC36 3.3V2_LED A9 A9 1 9 Anode
+24V 1 6 1 6 24V
GND 2 5 2 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 CONT_MOT_REM
Container motor CLOCK 4 3 4 3 CONT_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 5 2 CONT_MOT_LD TNMOT_M_OUT1 A10 A10 9 1 3 1
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 CONT_MOT_DIR
TNMOT_M_OUT2 A11 A11 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor M
Relay
YC24
TNMOT_C_OUT1 B1 B1 9 1 3 1
26 25 N.C.
+24V 1 1 25 25 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1 TNMOT_C_OUT2 B2 B2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor C
GND 2 2 24 24 GND
START/STOP 3 3 23 23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
Developer motor M CLOCK 4 4 22 22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
LD 5 5 21 21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD 3.3V2_LED B3 B3 7 3 3 3 3.3V
CW/CCW 6 6 20 20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR GND
THOP_PLS_C
B4
B5
B4
B5
6
5
Relay 4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Toner level sensor C
3.3V2 B6 B6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_C B7 B7 3 7 Emitter
THOP_LED_C B8 B8 2 8 Cathode
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1 3.3V2_LED B9 B9 1 9 Anode
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG
Developer BK CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK TNMOT_Y_OUT1 B10 B10 9 1 3 1
BRAKE 7 5 13 13
/ Belt motor +5V 8 4
TNMOT_Y_OUT2 B11 B11 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor Y
SGND 9 3
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1
3.3V2_LED B12 B12 7 3 3 3 3.3V
GND B13
THOP_PLS_Y B14
B13
B14
6
5
Relay 4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Toner level sensor Y
3.3V2 B15 B15 4 6 Collector
+24V 1 1 12 12 +24V4 THOP_FULL_Y B16 B16 3 7 Emitter
GND 2 2 11 11 GND THOP_LED_Y B17 B17 2 8 Cathode
START/STOP 3 3 10 10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM
Drum motor COL CLOCK 4 4 9 9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK
3.3V2_LED B18 B18 1 9 Anode
LD 5 5 8 8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 6 7 7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR
Toner Hopper
+24V 1 6 6 6 +24V4
GND 2 5 5 5 GND
START/STOP 3 4 4 4 DRM_BK_MOT_REM
Drum motor BK CLOCK 4 3 3 3 DRM_BK_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 2 2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 1 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2_F1
Developer clutch 2
1
2
1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-16
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND-1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Duplex sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 lower GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13
GND B14
B13
B14
B2
B1
B13
B14
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 Right cover switch
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Relay
Lift motor 1 1 1 2 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 Duplex clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 2 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Paper level sensor 2 lower GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
CAS_OP 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4
Relay
5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1
Relay
2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position switch
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 Relay 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
Retard sensor 2
3.3V
Vout
3
2
3
2
7
8
6
5
A9
A10
A9
A10
3.3V2_LED
TDRS2_SENS
Coveying cover
GND 1 1 9 4 A11 A11 GND
24V 1 2 1 2 1 2
Container cooling fan motor GND 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1
YC10
+3.3V2 5 5 1 12 1
YC9
1 3.3V2
FSRMOT_DIR 1 1 1 11 1 6 CW/CCW Fuser drive
FSRMOT_LD 2 2 2 10 2 5 LD
LEDREF 4 4 2 11 2 2 REG_F_LED
FSRMOT_CLK 3 3 3 9 3 4 CLOCK
ID sensor front GND 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND
FSRMOT_REM 4 4 4 8 4 3 START/STOP Fuser motor
IDS 2 2 4 9 4 4 ID_SENS_F_S
GND 5 5 5 7 5 2 GND
IDP 1 1 5 8 5 5 ID_SENS_F_P
+24V2IL2_FUSE 6 6 6 6 6 1 +24V
+3.3V2 5 5 6 7 6 6 3.3V2
LEDREF 4 4 7 Relay 6 7 7 REG_R_LED
Relay
ID sensor rear GND 3 3 8 5 8 8 GND FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 7 7 7 5 1 3
IDS 2 2 9 4 9 9 ID_SENS_R_S
IDP 1 1 10 3 10 10 ID_SENS_R_P FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser release motor
8 8 8 4 3 1
COM 1 2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
Cleaning solenoid ACT 2
Relay
1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL
EXFAN_LOCK 9 9 9 3 1 3 ALM
GND
EXFAN
10
11
10
11
10
11
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
24V
Eject fan motor
3 3 13 13 REG_CL
Registration clutch 2 2
1 1 14 14 +24V2_F2 Feed drive PWB (2/3)
9-17
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp BK ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor BK
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB BK GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC6 Developer PWB BK 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit BK Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer BK
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC11 YC3 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp M ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor M
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB M GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC7 Developer PWB M 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum heater 2 1 5V0_FUSE
Developer M
Drum unit M 1 2 SCL
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC12 YC4 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp C ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor C
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB C GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC8 Developer PWB C 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit C Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer C
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC13 YC5 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2 1 1 +24V2 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp Y ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0
T/C sensor Y
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB Y GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9 1 1
YC9 Developer PWB Y 3.3V2 10 10 2 2 Vibration motor
Drum unit Y Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer Y
YC14
GND 1 2 1 1 REM
Developer fan motor BK 24V 2
Relay
1 2 2 +24V2
GND 1 2 3 3 REM
Developer fan motor M 24V 2
Relay
1 4 4 +24V2
9-18
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Transfer high
voltage PWB Feed image PWB (4/6)
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 Black Black
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND White White
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 Blue 1 CH_LIVE
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 A12 A12 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 A13 A13 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 A14 A14 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 A15 A15 SGND
YC2 YC1
LIVE
NEUTRAL
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
LIVE
NEUTRAL
IH PWB (1/2)
YC3
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
PGND 3 3 Relay
+24V2IL 4 4
+24V2IL 5 5
+24V2IL 6 6
Fuse
YC1
B_BK_SLV_AC_CLK
B_BK_MAG_AC_CLK
17
16
17
16 Engine PWB (3/7) YC4
M_Y_I_SENS 15 15 B1 B1 M_Y_I_SENS CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
M_C_I_SENS 14 14 B2 B2 M_C_I_SENS CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
M_M_I_SENS 13 13 B3 B3 M_M_I_SENS NC 3 3
DISCHARGE 12 12 B4 B4 DISCHARGE NC 4 4
B_COL_SLV_AC_CLK 11 11 B5 B5 B_SLV_AC_CLK CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
B_COL_MAG_AC_CLK 10 10 B6 B6 B_MAG_AC_CLK 1 2
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT
B_K_SLV_AC_CNT
9
8
9
8
B7
B8
B7
B8
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT
B_K_SLV_AC_CNT
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6 PF drawer
M_AC_CLK 7 7 B9 B9 M_AC_CLK (for Cassette heater)
M_K_AC_CNT 6 6 B10 B10 M_K_AC_CNT 1 3
M_K_I_SENS
M_K_DC_CNT
5
4
5
4
B11
B12
B11
B12
M_K_I_SENS
M_K_DC_CNT
Power supply PWB (2/2)
B_K_SLV_DC_CNT 3 3 B13 B13 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT YC5
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 B14 B14 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT +24V2 1 1 1
SGND 1 1 B15 B15 SGND GND 2 2 2
PF drawer (PF power supply㸧
YC2 YC33
HV_REM 20 20 1 1 HV_REM
M_M_AC_CNT 19 19 2 2 M_M_AC_CNT YC8
M_C_AC_CNT 18 18 3 3 M_C_AC_CNT 12 12 5V0
M_Y_AC_CNT 17 17 4 4 M_Y_AC_CNT 11 11 GND
B_M_SLV_DC_CNT 16 16 5 5 B_M_SLV_DC_CNT
B_M_SLV_AC_CNT 15 15 6 6 B_M_SLV_AC_CNT
B_C_SLV_DC_CNT 14 14 7 7 B_C_SLV_DC_CNT
B_C_SLV_AC_CNT 13 13 8 8 B_C_SLV_AC_CNT YC42
B_C_MAG_AC_CNT 12 12 9 9 B_C_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT 11 11 10 10 B_Y_SLV_DC_CNT GND 2 2 9 9 GND
B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT 10 10 11 11 B_Y_SLV_AC_CNT 5V0 3 3 8 8 5V0
B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT 9 9 12 12 B_Y_MAG_AC_CNT GND 4 4 7 7 GND
B_M_MAG_AC_CNT 8 8 13 13 B_M_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 5 5 6 6 5V0
M_C_DC_CNT 7 7 14 14 M_C_DC_CNT GND 6 6 5 5 GND
M_Y_DC_CNT 6 6 15 15 M_Y_DC_CNT 5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
M_M_DC_CNT 5 5 16 16 M_M_DC_CNT GND 8 8 3 3 GND
B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 4 4 17 17 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
B_M_MAG_DC_CNT 3 3 18 18 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT GND 10 10 1 1 GND
B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 19 19 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT
SGND 1 1 20 20 SGND
Main PWB (1/3)
Main high
voltage PWB
9-19
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(4-8)Fuser PWB
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor F
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 Thermistor 3 (Edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 GND Fuser release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 Thermistor 4 (Press roller)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1
Relay
2 Thermistor 1 (Middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor R
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1
Relay
2 Thermistor 2 (Center)
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Discharge brush 1 1 1 CHARGE
IH PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2_FUSER 6 6 2 2 3.3V2_FUSER
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD 2 2 6 6 IH_TXD
IH_RXD 1 1 7 7 IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-20
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V2
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1
Relay
1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
Backlight 2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
SAR_2_CH22_P 9 9 52 52 SAR_2_CH22_P
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_N 8 8 53 53 SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION 8 8 8 8 ATTENTION
MEMORY 9 9 9 9 MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING 10 10 10 10 PROMISSING
JOB_LED 11 11 11 11 JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK
DATA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
CLK
DATA
ID
GND
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
ID
GND
SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
Operation unit
9-21
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
13 13 GND
14 14 TN_FAN_REM
9-22
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K YC16
DATAN2_K 2 2 2 2 DATAN2_K DP main PWB 16 1 B16 B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
GND 3 3 3 3 GND YC16 15 2 B15 B15 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K +24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K +24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND +24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY Relay
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
BD 12 12 12 12 BD DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK 5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P2 14 14 14 14 P2 DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
P0 15 15 15 15 P0 DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DATAP2_M 18 18 18 18 DATAP2_M DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
DATAN2_M 19 19 19 19 DATAN2_M DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
GND 20 20 20 20 GND DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
DATAP1_M 21 21 21 21 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 22 22 22 22 DATAN1_M DP
GND 23 23 23 23 GND
SD_CLK 24 24 24 24 SD_CLK
P4_Col 25 25 25 25 P4_Col
CSI_C 26 26 26 26 CSI_C
CSY_Y 27 27 27 27 CSY_Y YC4 YC1
A16 A16 GND
INT_ST 28 28 28 28 INT_ST +5V4IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V4IL_LSU A15 A15 GND
SET
CSI_M
29
30
29
30
29
30
29
30
SET
CSI_M
BD
NC
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
BD
NC
PD PWB 3.3V 3 3 A14 Relay A14 3.3V2
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
DIO 32 32 32 32 DIO
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI 34 34 34 34 DOI
GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI 36 36 36 36 SKOI YC5 Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V4
CSO 38 38 38 38 CSO PGND 2 2 4 4 GND
3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V2
GND 39 39 39 39 GND
DATAP2_C 40 40 40 40 DATAP2_C
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor Original detection sensor GND 2 2 A7 A7 GND
Vout 1 1 A6 A6 PLT_OPEN
DATAN2_C 41 41 41 41 DATAN2_C POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK
GND 42 42 42 42 GND
DATAP1_C 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_C
B/ 4 4 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAN1_C 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_C
A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6
DATAP2_Y 46 46 46 46 DATAP2_Y CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 Scanner motor A/ 3 3
DATAN2_Y
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN2_Y
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor B 2 2 A3 A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3 A 1 1 A2 A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B
DATAP1_Y 49 49 49 49 DATAP1_Y A1 A1 GND
DATAN1_Y 50 50 50 50 DATAN1_Y
YC7
TH 1 1 2 2 TH
NC 2 2 LSU thermistor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
DSI_CIS_4P 30 30 11 11 DSI_CIS_4P
DSI_CIS_4N 29 29 12 12 DSI_CIS_4N
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
DSI_CIS_3P 27 27 14 14 DSI_CIS_3P
DSI_CIS_3N 26 26 15 15 DSI_CIS_3N
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
DSI_CIS_2P 21 21 20 20 DSI_CIS_2P
DSI_CIS_2N 20 20 21 21 DSI_CIS_2N
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
DSI_CIS_1P 18 18 23 23 DSI_CIS_1P
DSI_CIS_1N 17 17 24 24 DSI_CIS_1N
GND 16 16 25 25 GND
Relay
4 4 TH CCD PWB
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3 3 3 OUT Weight detection
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V sensor
Image scanner unit
YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND 15 15 3 3 GND
CAS_HEATER 16 16 2 2 DRM_HEAT_REM Power supply PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-23
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F2_EFT2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB (1/2) B5 B5 CW/CCW
B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
B7 B7 GND
B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
Eject unit
A/ 1 4 1 12 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
A 2 3 2 11 B10 B10 IHMOT_2A
Rear eject motor B/ 3 2 3 10 B11 B11 IHMOT_1A
B 4 1 4 9 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Eject reversing motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor lower GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor upper GND 2 2 2 11 A9 A9 GND
Vout 1 1 3 10 A10 A10 EXINNER_FULL
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Eject/IH fan motor front
YC1 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH fan motor center
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum-Developer TPC_Y
TPC_C
11
10
11
10
B10
B11
B10
B11
TPC_Y
TPC_C
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
9-24
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor BK
6 6 CONT_RECOG
TNMOT_C_OUT1 B1 B1 9 1 3 1
TNMOT_C_OUT2 B2 B2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor C
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK 3.3V2_LED B3 B3 7 3 3 3 3.3V
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG GND B4 B4 6
Relay
4 2 2 GND Toner level sensor C
Developer BK CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK
THOP_PLS_C B5 B5 5 5 1 1 Vout
BRAKE 7 5 13 13
/ Belt motor +5V 8 4 3.3V2 B6 B6 4 6 Collector
SGND 9 3 THOP_FULL_C B7 B7 3 7 Emitter
SIG1 10 2 THOP_LED_C B8 B8 2 8 Cathode
SIG2 11 1 3.3V2_LED B9 B9 1 9 Anode
YC23
1 3 1 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1
Belt release motor 2
3
2
1 2 2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2_F1
Developer clutch 2
1
2
1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-25
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 upper GND 2 2 4
Relay
5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Duplex sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 lower GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13
GND B14
B13
B14
B2
B1
B13
B14
2
1
4
5
2
1
2
1 Right cover switch
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Lift motor 1 1 1 2
Relay 1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 Duplex clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 2 upper GND 2 2 4 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 Relay 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Paper level sensor 2 lower GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
CAS_OP 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4 Relay 5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 B13 B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2 GND 3 3 4 3 B14 B14 GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
MPFLIFT_OUT1 1 1 12 1 2 1
YC6 MPFLIFT_OUT2 2 2 11 2 1 Relay 2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
MPFLIFT_HP 3 3 10 3 2 2
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2
GND 4 4 9 4 1 1 MP position switch
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2 Relay
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
3.3V 3 3 7 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED Coveying cover
Retard sensor 2 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
A10
A11
A10
A11
TDRS2_SENS
GND
Cleaning solenoid
COM 1
Relay
2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser release motor
ACT 2 1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL 8 8 3 1
9-26
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Cleaning lamp BK ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 Relay 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor BK
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB BK GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC6 Developer PWB BK 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC11 YC3 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Cleaning lamp M ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3
Relay 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4
Relay
3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor M
EEP_SCL 6 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB M GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC7 Developer PWB M 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC12 YC4 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Cleaning lamp C ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor C
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5 Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB C GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC8 Developer PWB C 3.3V2 10 10
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC13 YC5 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
ERASER_REM 1 1 5V_FUSE ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
Cleaning lamp Y ERASER_GND 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
3 NC 24V2/5V0 4 3 24V2/5V0 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
4 NC ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 N.C. 4 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0
T/C sensor Y
EEP_SCL 6
Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2 5
Relay 6 3.3V2 3.3V2 6 6 3 3 3.3V2
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2 8 7 3.3V2 EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB Y GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
VIB_MOT 9 9
YC9 Developer PWB Y 3.3V2 10 10
9-27
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 Blue 1 CH_LIVE
YC1 YC1
Relay
5V0 1 1 YC7 LIVE_IN 1 1 Yellow 2 COM Power switch
GND 2 2 1 1 +24V4 LIVE_OUT 2 2 White 3 LIVE_OUT
GND 3 3 2 2 GND NEUTRAL_IN 3 3 Yellow 5 COM
YC34 GND 4 4 3 3 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 4 4 White 6 NEUTRAL_OUT
CL_CNT 11 11 3 11 1 1 CL_CNT +24V4 5 5 4 4 +24V4
T1_Y_CNT 10 10 4 10 2 2 T1_Y_CNT +24V4 6 6 5 5 +24V4
T1_C_CNT 9 9 5 9 3 3 T1_C_CNT 6 6 GND
T1_M_CNT 8 8 6 8 4 4 T1_M_CNT
T1_I_SENS 7 7 7 7 5 5 T1_I_SENS
T2_OFF__REM 6 6 8 6 6 6 T2_OFF_REM
T1_K_CNT 5 5 9 5 7 7 T1_K_CNT
Triac
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 8 8 SP_CNT
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 9 9 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 10 10 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 11 11 SGND
YC2 YC1
LIVE 1 1 1 1 LIVE
NEUTRAL 2 2 2 2 NEUTRAL IH PWB (1/2)
YC2
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
+24V2IL 3 3
+24V2IL 4 4
Fuse
YC1 YC33 YC4
B_MAG_AC_CLK 1 1 18 18 B_MAG_AC_CLK CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT 2 2 17 17 B_Y_MAG_DC_CNT CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
M_Y_I_SENS 3 3 16 16 M_Y_I_SENS NC 3 3
M_C_I_SENS 4 4 15 15 M_C_I_SENS NC 4 4
M_K_I_SENS 5 5 14 14 M_K_I_SENS CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
M_M_I_SENS 6 6 13 13 M_M_I_SENS 1 2
M_Y_DC_CNT
B_CLR_MAG_AC_CNT
7
8
7
8
12
11
12
11
M_Y_DC_CNT
B_CLR_MAG_AC_CNT
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6 PF drawer
B_C_MAG_DC_CNT 9 9 10 10 B_C_MAG_DC_CNT (for Cassette heater)
M_M_DC_CNT
M_K_DC_CNT
10
11
10
11
9
8
9
8
M_M_DC_CNT
M_K_DC_CNT
Power supply PWB (2/2) 1 3
B_M_MAG_DC_CNT 12 12 7 7 B_M_MAG_DC_CNT
M_C_DC_CNT 13 13 6 6 M_C_DC_CNT YC5
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 14 14 5 5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT +24V2 1 1 1
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 15 15 4 4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT GND 2 2 2
PF drawer (PF power supply)
HV_REM 16 16 3 3 HV_REM
SGND 17 17 2 2 SGND
1 1 SGND
YC8
12 12 5V0
MAG(BK) 1 1 1
Developer (BK) 11 11 GND
MAG(C) 1 1 1
Developer (C) YC42
5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
MAG(M) 1 1 1
Developer (M) GND 2 2 9 9 GND
Engine PWB (3/7) 5V0
GND
3
4
3
4
8
7
8
7
5V0
GND
MAG(Y) 1 1 1
Developer (Y) 5V0
GND
5
6
5
6
6
5
6
5
5V0
GND
5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
GND 8 8 3 3 GND
5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
GND 10 10 1 1 GND
9-28
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
(5-8)Fuser PWB
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor F
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2 2 2 2 2 2 EEP_SDA FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7
FUSER_SCL 3 3 3 3 3 3 EEP_SCL GND 8 8 Thermistor 3 (Edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 GND Fuser release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 Thermistor 4 (Press roller)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Thermostat
GND 12 12 14 14 2 1
FSR_TH_MIDDLE 13 13 15 15 1 Relay 2 Thermistor 1 (Middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor R
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND 17 17 19 19 2 1
FSR_TH_CENTRAL 18 18 20 20 1
Relay
2 Thermistor 2 (Center)
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Discharge brush 1 1 1 CHARGE
IH PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2 6 6 2 2 3.3V2
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD 2 2 6 6 IH_TXD
IH_RXD 1 1 7 7 IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-29
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V4
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15 15 V6 2 2 B1 B1 POWER_ON
16 16 V7 Power switch 1 Relay 1 B2 B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
27 27 GND LED_MEMORY B8 B8 B8 B8 LED_MEMORY GND 51 51 10 10 GND
LCD 28 28 RxIN0+ LED_ATTENTION B7 B7 B9 B9 LED_ATTENTION OS_SAD2P 50 50 11 11 OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
Backlight 2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
SAR_2_CH22_P 9 9 52 52 SAR_2_CH22_P
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_N 8 8 53 53 SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION 8 8 8 8 ATTENTION
MEMORY 9 9 9 9 MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING 10 10 10 10 PROMISSING
JOB_LED 11 11 11 11 JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60 YC56
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7 3.3V0 1
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7 DBTXD 2
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7 DBRXD 3
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND DBCLK 4
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND GND 5
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK
DATA
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
CLK
DATA
ID
GND
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
ID
GND
SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
NIRQ 1 1 5 5 NIRQ
GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
Operation unit
9-30
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC38 YC1
TEMP B11 B11 1 11 1 4 TEMP
GND B10 B10 2 10 2 3 GND
Temperature/humidity sensor
HUMID_OUT B9
HUMID_CLK B8
B9
B8
3
4
9
8
3
4
2
1
HUMID_OUT
HUMID_CLK
(outside machine㸧
LVU_PWB_FAN_REM B7 B7 5 7 1 1 24V
GND
LVU_PWB_FAN_ALM
B6
B5
B6
B5
6
7 Relay
6
5
2
3
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Power supply fan motor
SUB_CLK B4 B4 8 4
SUB_SDA B3 B3 9 3
GND B2 B2 10 2
3.3V0 B1 B1 11 1
1 1
2 2
Relay 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
PF_VER_SENS A11 A11 1 11 10 10 1 PF_VER_SENS
3.3V3_FUSE A10 A10 2 10 11 11 2 3.3V3_FUSE
GND A9 A9 3 9 12 12 3 GND
PF_SEL1 A8 A8 4 8 13 13 4 PF_SEL1
PF_SEL2 A7 A7 5 7 14 Relay 14 5 PF_SEL2
PF_CLK A6 A6 6 Relay 6 15 15 6 PF_CLK
PF_RDY A5 A5 16 16 7 PF_RDY
PF_SDI A4 A4 8 4 17 17 8 PF_SDO
PF_SDO A3 A3 9 3 18 18 9 PF_SDI
PF_PAUSE A2 A2 10 2 19 19 10 PF_PAUSE
PF_CAS_OPEN A1 A1 11 1 20 20 11 PF_CAS_OPEN PF main PWB
1 1 1 +24V2 4 4 1 +24V2
LVU YC5 2 2 2 GND 5 5 2 GND
2 AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
PF interlock switch
9-31
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC3
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V3
BR job separator sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
JS_SENS_AK
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 5 GND BR main PWB
Vout 1 1 6 6 BRG_JAM1
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 8 8 GND
Vout 1 1 9 9 BRG_JAM2
Relay
A1 A1 14 14 7 7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF)
15 15 6 6 DF_DET(DF to ENG)
16 16 5 5 DF_SYNC(DF to ENG)
7 1 7 1 1 17 17 4 4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG)
6 2 6 2 2 A2 A2 18 18 3 3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF)
5 3 5 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 A3 A3 19 19 2 2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF)
Relay A4 A4
3 5 3 5 5 A5 A5 20 20 1 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG)
2 6 2 6 6 A6 A6
1 7 1 7 7 A7 A7
YC25
DF main PWB 4 4 4
1
2
Relay
1
2
A8
A9
A8
A9
5
4
5
4
1
2
1
2
+24V2
+24V2
3 3 3 A10 A10 3 3
B1 B1 2 2 3 3 GND
1K/4K B2
B3
B2
B3
1 1 4 4 GND
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
3 3
B7
B8
B7
B8
Feed image PWB (6/6)
2 2 2 4 4 B9 B9
1 1 1 B10 B10
Document finisher
9-32
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC22
1 GND YC23
2 DC1_SET
+5V0_FUSE A1
3 DC1_COUNT
4 +24V2
+5V0_FUSE A2
+5V0_FUSE A3 USB hub PWB (2/2)
+5V0_FUSE A4
+5V0_FUSE A5
+5V0_FUSE A6 YC1
+5V0_FUSE A7
+5V0_FUSE A8 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
MK2_ENBL A9 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
+24V2 A10 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + IC CARD
MK2_RKEY7 B1 GND 4 4 4 GND
YC21 MK2_RKEY6 B2
1 1 1 1 +24V2 MK2_RKEY5 B3
2 2 2 2 SGND MK2_RKEY4 B4
3 3 3 3 SGND MK2_RKEY3 B5
4 4 4 4 MCV_ENBL MK2_RKEY2 B6
5 5 5 5 FGND MK2_RKEY1 B7
Coin vendor 6 6 6 6 MCV_FED_COUNT MK2_RKEY0 B8
YC2
Reley GND B9 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
㸦option㸧 7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
MCV_EJ_COUNT
MCV_COPY_SIG MK2_COUNT B10 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
KEY BOARD
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA +
9 9 9 9 MCV_UART_TXD
GND 4 4 4 GND
10 10 10 10 SGND
11 11 11 11 MCV_UART_RXD
12 12 12 12 SGND
YC4 YC4
GND 1 1 41 41 GND
SAR_1_CH23_N 2 2 40 40 SAR_1_CH23_N
SAR_1_CH23_P 3 3 39 39 SAR_1_CH23_P
GND 4 4 38 38 GND
SAR_1_CH22_N 5 5 37 37 SAR_1_CH22_N
SAR_1_CH22_P 6 6 36 36 SAR_1_CH22_P
GND 7 7 35 35 GND
SAR_1_CH21_N 8 8 34 34 SAR_1_CH21_N
SAR_1_CH21_P 9 9 33 33 SAR_1_CH21_P
GND 10 10 32 32 GND
SAR_1_VCLK2_N 11 11 31 31 SAR_1_VCLK2_N YC58 YC2
SAR_1_VCLK2_P 12 12 30 30 SAR_1_VCLK2_P 20 USB_- GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 13 13 29 29 GND 19 USB_+ TXP 2 2 2 2 A+
SAR_1_CH13_N 14 14 28 28 SAR_1_CH13_N 18 DETECT TXN 3 3 3 3 A-
SAR_1_CH13_P 15 15 27 27 SAR_1_CH13_P 17 RESET GND 4 4 4 4 GND
GND 16 16 26 26 GND 16 GND RXN 5 5 5 5 B-
SAR_1_CH12_N 17 17 25 25 SAR_1_CH12_N 15 HOSTWAKE RXP 6 6 6 6 B+
SAR_1_CH12_P 18 18 24 24 SAR_1_CH12_P 14 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 19 19 23 23 GND 13 PAVDO
SAR_1_CH11_N 20 20 22 22 SAR_1_CH11_N 12 GND
SAR_1_CH11_P 21 21 21 21 SAR_1_CH11_P 11 VBAT
GND 22 22 20 20 GND WiFi PWB 10 VIO
SAR_1_VCLK1_N 23 23 19 19 SAR_1_VCLK1_N 9 GND 1 1 3.3V
SAR_1_VCLK1_P 24 24 18 18 SAR_1_VCLK1_P 8 SD_D0 2 2 3.3V KUIO relay PWB
GND 25 25 17 17 GND 7 SD_D1 3 3 3.3V
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 26 26 16 16 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 6 GND 4 4 GND YC2
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 27 27 15 15 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 5 SD_CLK 5 5 GND VBUS1 20 20 VBUS
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 28 28 14 14 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 4 GND YC32 6 6 GND USB_DN1 19 19 USB_DN
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 29 29 13 13 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 3 SD_CMD GND 3 3 7 7 5V USB_DP1 18 18 USB_DP
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 30 30 12 12 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 2 SD_D2 +5V_HDD 2 2 8 8 5V GND 17 17 GND
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 31 31 11 11 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 1 SD_D3 GND 1 1 9 9 5V NC 16 16 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 32 32 10 10 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 10 10 GND NC 15 15 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
33
34
33
34
9
8
9
8
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
Standard in some 11
12
11
12
ACT
GND
GND
NC
14
13
14
13
GND
NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N 35 35 7 7 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N markets and some 13 13 12V NC 12 12 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 36 36 6 6 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 14 14 12V GND 11 11 GND
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N 37 37 5 5 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N models 15 15 12V NC 10 10 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P 38 38 4 4 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P Main PWB (3/3) NC 9 9 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P
39
40
39
40
3
2
3
2
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P HDD NC
AUDIO1
8
7
8
7
NC
AUDIO
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N 41 41 1 1 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N WAKEUP 6 6 WAKEUP
(Optional in some markets GND 5 5 GND
VDD5_CUT1 4 4 VDD5_CUT
YC2 YC33
and some models㸧 RESETN1 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
+5V 1 1 10 10 5V VDD5 1 1 VDD5
+5V 2 2 9 9 5V
GND 3 3 8 8 SGND
GND 4 4 7 7 SGND
SDI 5 5 6 6 SDI YC8 YC3
SDICLK
GND
6
7
6
7
5
4
5
4
SDICLK
SGND
VBUS1
USB_DN1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
VBUS1
USB_DN1
KUIO PWB
SDO 8 8 3 3 SDO USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1
SDOCLK 9 9 2 2 SDOCLK GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1
GND 10 10 1 1 SGND AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 VBUS0 20 20 VBUS
N.C. 11 11 WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 USB_DN0 19 19 USB_DN
RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 USB_DP0 18 18 USB_DP
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 17 17 GND
YC5 VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 NC 16 16 NC
1 16 LockPin(2) USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 NC 15 15 NC
2 15 LockPin(1) USB_DP0 11 11 11 11 USB_DP0 GND 14 14 GND
FIERY relay PWB 3 14 GRLED_K2 GND 12 12 12 12 GND NC 13 13 NC
4 13 GRLED_A2 AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 NC 12 12 NC
5 12 GRLED_K1 WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 11 11 GND
6 11 GRLED_A1 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESET0 NC 10 10 NC
YC3 7 10 TD4- NC 9 9 NC
CH1_RX0N 1 1 8 9 TD4+ NC 8 8 NC
CH1_RX0P 2 2 9 8 TD3- AUDIO0 7 7 AUDIO
GND 3 3 10 7 TD3+ YC9 YC4 WAKEUP0 6 6 WAKEUP
N.C. 4 4 11 6 CT2 GND 1 6 1 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
N.C. 5 5 Fiery (KDA/KDE) 12 5 CT1 5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 VDD5_CUT0 4 4 VDD5_CUT
MFP_READYN 6 6 13 4 TD2- GND 3 4 3 4 GND RESETN0 3 3 RESETN
FIERY_READYN 7 7 14 3 TD2+ 5V 4 3 4 3 5V GND 2 2 GND
N.C. 8 8 15 2 TD1- GND 5 2 5 2 GND VDD5 1 1 VDD5
POWER_CONTROLLN 9 9 16 1 TD1+ 5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1
N.C. 10 10
GND 11 11
N.C. 12 12
N.C. 13 13
CH1_LOCKN 14 14
GND 15 15
CH1_HTPDN
RESERVE_INN
16
17
16
17
FIERY control PWB
RESERVE_OUTN 18 18
GND 19 19
N.C. 20 20
N.C. 21 21
GND 22 22
UART_TXD_EFI 23 23
UART_RXD_EFI 24 24
9-33
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC3 YC6
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG 3.3V_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
12
2
5
15
2
3
2
3
ENG_RDY
ENG_SEL
GND
LNG_SW
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP original length sensor
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI 3.3V 4 4 3 3 3.3V
1
13
16
4
6
7
6
7
ENG_SO
DP_OPEN
HSIZE
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
DP original width sensor
11 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW
Engine PWB 10
9
Relay 7
8
9
10
9
10
EN_SET_SW
3.3V3
8 9 11 11 GND
7 10 12 12 GND
6
5
11
12
13
14
13
14
GND
24V
DP main PWB
4 13 15 15 24V
3 14 16 16 24V
YC9
FMOT_CH_A 1 1 1 1 CH_A
FMOT_CH_B 2 2 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 3 3 3.3V
FMOT_DIR 4 4 4 4 DIR
FMOT_PWM 5 5 5 5 PWM DP paper feed motor
FMOT_BRAKE 6 6 6 6 BRAKE
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
R24V 8 8 8 8 24V
YC7
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED CMOT_CH_A 9 9 1 1 CH_A
DP registration sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
RGST_SW
CMOT_CH_B
3.3V
10
11
10
11
2
3
2
3
CH_B
3.3V
CMOT_DIR 12 12 4 4 DIR
GND 3 3 4 4 GND CMOT_PWM 13 13 5 5 PWM DP conveying motor
DP CCD sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
5
6
5
6
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
CMOT_BRAKE
GND
14
15
14
15
6
7
6
7
BRAKE
GND
R24V 16 16 8 8 24V
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V_LED
DP open/close sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
8
9
GND
DP_OPEN
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V_LED
DP lift lower limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
11
12
11
12
GND
LF_DNSW
YC11
LIFT_A1 1 1 4 1 A
LIFT_B1 2 2 3 2 B
LIFT_A3 3 3 2 3 A/ DP lift motor
LIFT_B3 4 4 1 4 B/
RMOT_CH_A 5 5 1 1 CH_A
YC17 RMOT_CH_B 6 6 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED 3.3V 7 7 3 3 3.3V
DP eject sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
EXIT_SW
RMOT_DIR
RMOT_PWM
8
9
8
9
4
5
4
5
DIR
PWM DP switchback motor
RMOT_BRAKE 10 10 6 6 BRAKE
GND 11 11 7 7 GND
R24V 12 12 8 8 24V
YC8
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP original detection sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
SET_SW
3.3V YC16
LED_REM 1 1 12 1 1 1 LED_REM
24V 2 2 11 2 2 2 24V DP LED PWB
3.3V_LED 3 3 10 3 3 3 3.3V
GND
SFT_HP_SW
4
5
4
5
9
8
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP feedshift sensor
3.3V_LED 6 6 7 6 3 3 3.3V
Relay
YC4
GND
LF_UP_SW
7
8
7
8
6
5
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP lift upper limit sensor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP paper feed sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
FD_SW
3.3V SFT_A1
YC10
1 1 4 9 4 1 A
4 4 NC SFT_B1 2 2 3 10 3 2 B
SFT_A3 3 3 2 11 2 3 A/ DP feedshift motor
SFT_B3 4 4 1 12 1 4 B/
YC5
1 1 1 1 24V
DP top cover switch 2 2
2
3
2 GND
3 R24V
㸦Interlock switch㸧
9-34
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
Y C 11ࠉ
SCLK 1
SDA 2 S H D PWB CIS PWB
1Piece_SIG 3
2Piece_SIG 4
GND 5 Multi feed detection sensor
3.3V 6
GND 7
24V 8
9-35
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC3 YC9 2 2 NC
DP original detection 3 3 1 1 ANODE OUT1B 1 1 3 3 _A
2 2 2 2 GND OUT1A 2 2 1 1 A
sensor 1 1 3 3 SET_SW OUT2A 3 3 4 4 B DP paper feed motor
OUT2B 4 4 6 6 _B
5 5 NC
YC2
DP original length 3 3 1 1 ANODE OUT1B 5 5 3 3 A3
2 2 2 2 GND OUT1A 6 6 1 1 A1
sensor 1 1 3 3 LS_SW OUT2A 7 7 2 2 B1
DP feedshift motor
OUT2B 8 8 4 4 B3
YC4
WID1 1 1 4 4 WID1
DP original width GND 2 2 3 3 GND
sensor WID2 3 3 2 2 WID2
WID3 4 4 1 1 WID3
YC10
YC5 +R24V 1
3 3 1 1 ANODE FAN 2
DP paper feed sensor 2 2 2 2 GND
1 1 3 3 FEED SW
3 3 4 4 ANODE YC1
DP registration sensor 2 2 5 5 GND ENG_TMG 1 1 3 14
1 1 6 6 REGIST_SW ENG_RDY 2 2 5 12
ENG_SEL 3 3 15 2
ENG_CLK 4 4 1 16
3 3 1 6 7 7 ANODE ENG_SI 5 5 2 15
DP open/close sensor 2 2 2 5 8 8 GND ENG_SO 6 6 16 1
1 1 3 4 9 9 DP_OPENSW DP_OPEN 7 7 4 13
EN_FD_SW 8 8 6 11
EN_SET_SW 9 9 7
Relay
10
Engine PWB
3.3V3 10 10 8 9
3 3 1 3 10 10 ANODE GND 11 11 9 8
Relay
DP feedshift sensor 2 2 2 Relay 2 11 11 GND GND 12 12 10 7
1 1 3 1 12 12 HP_SW GND 13 13 11 6
24V 14 14 12 5
24V 15 15 13 4
3 3 4 3 13 13 ANODE 24V 16 16 14 3
DP CCD sensor 2 2 5 2 14 14 GND
1 1 6 1 15 15 TMG_SW
YC6
1 1 GND
Cathode 1 1 2 2 LED_REM
LED PWB Anode 2 2 3 3 LED_PW
YC7
1 1 +24V
COM 1 2 2 NC
DP top cover switch N.O. 2 3 3 +R24V
㸦Interlock switch㸧
YC8
REMOTE 3 3 1 1 FEED_CL
DP paper feed clutch NC 2 2
24V 1 1 2 2 +R24V
REMOTE 3 3 3 3 REGIST_CL
DP registration clutch NC 2 2
24V 1 1 4 4 +R24V
DP main PWB
9-36
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 10 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 12 1 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 1 2
1
2
1 2 9 2 2 24V1
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
11
10
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper detection sensor 1
3 3 3 8 3 3 FEED_CL1 A 9 4 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 1 2
1
2
1 4 7 4 4 24V1
B 8 5 2 2 GND PF paper detection sensor 2
C 7 6 1 1 Vout
Relay
3 3 5 6 5 5 VER_CL2 D 6 7 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 2 2
1
2
1 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1
E 5 8 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 1
F 4 9 1 1 GND
3 3 7 4 7 7 FEED_CL2 G 3 10 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 3 8 8 24V1
H 2 11 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
I 1 12 1 1 GND
3 3 9 2 9 9 HDR_CL2
PF speed switching clutch 2
1
2
1 10 1 10 10 24V1
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
YC4
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF Paper level sensor 1 upper
3.3V 3 3 1 20 1 1 3.3V4_LED
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
19
18
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
GND 8 8 2 7 2 2 GND PF Paper level sensor 1 lower
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 8 1 1 Vout
3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 17 4 4 3.3V4_LED
GND 10 10 Relay
PF conveying sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
16
15
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
4 Relay 3
GND 12 12
5 2
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 2 5 2 2 PF Paper length switch 1
GND 14 14 3 Relay 4 3 3
6 1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
2 2 7 14 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch 1 1 8 13 8 8 GND
GND
CAS1_SET_SW
16
17
16
17
5
6
2
1
2
1
2
1 PF cassette insertion switch 1
8
7
1
2
2
1
2
1 PF paper width switch 1
Relay
J 2 1
3.3V 3 3 9 12 9 9 3.3V5_LED 1
Relay 2
K
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
11
10
10
11
10
11
GND
ULIM_SW_2
YC5
3.3V5_LED 1 1 A
GND 2 2 B
CAS2_EMPTY 3 3 C
3.3V 3 3 12 9 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF conveying sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
13
14
8
7
13
14
13
14
GND
VER_SENS_2
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
GND 5 5 5 4 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 5 1 1 Vout PF Paper level sensor 2 upper
15 6 15 15 3.3V4
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
16 5 16 16 CAS1_WSIZE
17 4 17 17 GND
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
8
9
8
9
2
1
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF Paper level sensor 2 lower
18 3 18 18 3.3V5
GND 10 10
19 2 19 19 CAS2_WSIZE CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
Relay
20 1 20 20 GND
GND 12 12
J
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS
GND
13
14
13
14
2
3
5
4
2
3
2
3
PF paper length switch 2
Relay
K CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
3.3V 3 3 L
GND 16 16 5 2 2 2 8 1 2 2
PF zero sensor 1 Vout 2 2 M CAS2_SET_SW 17 17 6 1 1 1 PF cassette insertion switch 2 7 2 1 1 PF paper width switch 2
GND 1 1 NC 18 18
3.3V 3 3
PF zero sensor 2 Vout 2 2 L 2
1 Relay
1
2
GND 1 1 M
YC6
2 2 1 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 Relay 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR
2 2 1 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 1 1 NC
PF lift motor 2 1 1 2 Relay 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR 2 2 NC
3 3 NC
4 4 NC
5 5 NC
6 6 NC
YC8 7 7 NC
+24V 1 6 1 6 1 1 +24V 8 8 NC
GND 2 5 2 5 2 2 GND YC12 9 9 NC
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 3 3 START/STOP VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
PF paper feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 Relay 3 4 4 CLOCK 3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
LD 5 2 5 2 5 5 LD GND 3 3 12 12 GND
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 14 14 PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK
EN_RDY 7 7 16 Relay 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO
EN_SDI
8
9
8
9
17
18
17
18
EH_SDO
EH_SDI Engine PWB
16 EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
15 PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
14
13 YC11
9 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
8 YC13 GND 2 2 5 5 GND
7 1 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
2 3 3 AN_PF_SDI 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF main PWB 4 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
(Side paper feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND 3 3 FG
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
1 1
4 YC10 Outlet
3 1 1 GND
2 2
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
AC_LIVE 1 1
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
G 4 4 3.3V4_LED
H 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
I 6 6 GND
9-37
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 6 1 A
PF vertical conveying clutch 2
1
2
1 2 2 24V1
GND 2 2 5 2 B
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 4 3 C
3 3 9 9 HDR_CL2 GND 10 10 2 2
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 2 2 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 1 PF cassette switch 1
1 1 10 10 24V1 GND 12 12
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13
GND 14 14
YC4 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
3.3V 3 3 1 17 1 1 3.3V4_LED GND 16
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
16
15
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
CAS1_WSIZE 17
YC5
PF vertical conveying 3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 14 4 4 3.3V4_LED 3.3V5_LED 1 1 3 4 9 1 3 3 3.3V
sensor
GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
13
12
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
GND
CAS2_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
2
1
5
6
8
7
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper detection sensor 2
4 Relay 3
5 2 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V
6 1 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 1
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout lowe J 6 4 3 3 3.3V
2 2 7 11 7 7 COVER_OPEN
Relay K 5 5 2 2 GND PF lift upper limit sensor 2
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 4 3 3 3.3V PF paper level sensor 2 L 4 Relay 6 1 1 Vout
PF right cover switch 1 1 8 10 8 8 GND GND 8 8 2 5 2 2 GND
CAS2_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout upper
3.3V 3 3 9 Relay 9 A GND 10 10
PF empty sensor 1 GND 2 2 10 8 B CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 M 3 7 7 1 1 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 11 7 C N 2 8 6 2 2 2 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
O 1 9 5 3 3 3 1 1 GND
4 4 Relay 4 4
3.3V 3 3 12 6 D GND 12 12 2 2 3 5 5 5
PF retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 13 5 E CAS2_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 1 1 PF cassette switch 2 2 6 6 6
GND 1 1 14 4 F GND 14 14 1 7 7 7
CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
GND 16 16
CAS2_WSIZE 17
3.3V 3 3 15 3 G NC 18
PF zero sensor 1 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
16
17
2
1
H
I
J 9 9 3.3V5_LED
K 10 10 GND
L 11 11 ULIM_SW_2
3.3V 3 3 1 3 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF horizontal conveying sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 2 13 13 GND
Vout 1 1 3 1 14 14 VER_SENS_2 1 1 NC
2 2 NC
G 15 15 3.3V4 3 3 NC
H 16 16 P0R_SW 4 4 NC
I 17 17 GND 5 5 NC
6 6 NC
18 18 3.3V5 7 7 NC
19 19 P0L_SW 8 8 NC
20 20 GND YC12 9 9 NC
VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
GND 3 3 12 12 GND
PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 14 14 PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK Engine PWB
EN_RDY 7 7 16 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO 8 8 17 Relay 17 EH_SDO
YC6 EN_SDI 9 9 18 18 EH_SDI
2 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
YC11
2 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
PF lift motor 2 1 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR GND 2 2 5 5 GND
YC8
+24V 1 6 1 1 +24V 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 5 2 2 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PF paper feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 4 CLOCK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
LD 5 2 5 5 LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW 3 3 FG
16
1 1
15
14
Outlet
13 2 2
9
AC_LIVE 1 1
8
7 1
YC13
1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
PF main PWB 2
4
3
4
3
4
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
(Side paper feeder) 3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
4 YC10
3 1 1 GND
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
M 4 4 3.3V4_LED
N 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
O 6 6 GND
9-38
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
PF main PWB
YC15 YC6
3 3 1 1 FDR_CL LDPSW1_3.3V1 1 1 9 1 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2 GND 2 2 8 2 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 1 upper
1 1 2 2 +24V2_F1 LDPSW1 3 3 7 3 1 1 Vout
3 HOR_CL1
LDPSW2_3.3V1 4 4 6 4 3 3 3.3V
4 +24V2_F1 GND 5 5 5 Relay 5 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 2 lower
LDPSW2 6 6 4 6 1 1 Vout
5 HOR_CL2
8 +24V2_F1
DEK_OPN1_3.3V2 10 10
GND 11 11 2 2
DEK_OPN1 12 12 1 1 PF paper feeder sensor
NC 13 13
YC3
RDPSW1_3.3V1 1
GND 2
YC5 RDPSW1 3
2 2 1 1 GND RDPSW2_3.3V1 4
PF set switch 1 1 2 2 CVROP_SW GND 5
RDPSW2 6
SZSW1_3.3V1 7
3 3 VER_CL GND 8
4 4 +24V2_F1 SZSW1 9
5 5 VCVSW_3.3V1 DEK_OPN2_3.3V2 10
6 6 GND GND 11
7 7 VCVSW DEK_OPN2 12
1 3 1 12 8 8 +24V2_F1
YC4
PF paper feed solenoid 2
3
Relay 2
1
2
3
11
10
9
10
9
10
FDR_SOLA
FDR_SOLK EPLSW_3.3V3 1
GND 2
EPLSW 3
3.3V 3 3 4 9 11 11 EPRSW_3.3V1 LULMSW_3.3V3 4
GND 5
PF paper detection sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
5
6
8
7
12
13
12
13
GND
EPRSW LULMSW 6
3.3V3 7
Relay P0LSW 8
3.3V 3 3 7 6 14 14 RULMSW_3.3V1 GND 9
HCVSW1_3.3V3 10
PF lift upper limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
15
16
15
16
3.3V4
RULMSW GND 11
HCVSW1 12
3.3V 3 3 10 3 17 17 3.3V1
PF zero sensor Vout 2 2 11 2 18 18 P0RSW
GND 1 1 12 1 19 19 GND
YC13
SDO 1 1 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
SDI 2 2 2 2 AN_PF_SDI
CLK 3 3 1 1 AN_PF_CLK
SEL 4 4 3 3 PF_CAS2_SEL
RDY 5 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
YC8 PAUSE 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_PAUSE
1 2 1 1 OUT2 DEK_OPN1 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
PF lift motor 2 1 2 2 OUT1 DEK_OPN2 8 8
+3.3V4 9 9 10 10 3.3V3
GND 10 10 11 11 GND
YC7ࠉ292132-4 SD_FINAL_SENS 11 11 12 Relay 12 AN_VER_SENS
1 OUT1B(L_2) PF_FINAL_SENS 12 12 8 8 NC
2 OUT1A(L_1) 9 9 NC
13 13 NC PF main PWB
14 14 NC
3
4
OUT2B(R_2)
OUT2A(R_1)
15
16
15
16
NC
NC 㸦desk㸧
YC11 4 4 NC
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC18 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
CH_A 8 8 1 1 FMOT_CH_A 24V2 3 3 1 1 24V2
CH_B 7 7 2 2 FMOT_CH_B 24V2 4 4
3.3V 6 6 3 3 3.3V
DIR 5 5 4 4 FMOT_DIR
PF conveying motor PWM 4 4 5 5 FMOT_PWM
BRAKE 3 3 6 6 FMOT_BRAKE N N AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 2 7 7 GND
24V 1 1 8 8 +24V2_F1
L Relay L AC_LIVE
G G FG
YC16
1 +24V
2 GND
3 START/STOP
4 CLOCK
5 LD
6 CW/CCW
AC_LIVE 1 1
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
YC10
LVU_FAN 1
+24V2_F1 2
YC12
GND 1
GND 2
24V2 3
YC14
HOR_UNIT 1
+3.3V1 2
9-39
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC8
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 YC17
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PADDLE SENS A 1 1 3 3
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF eject motor GND 2 2 2 2 DF paddle sensor
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PADDLE SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5 1 GND 4 4 3 3
STP MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 2 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
STP MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 1
STP MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 4 2 2 DF slide motor
STP MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 5 1 1 STRY EJE SENS A 7
GND 8
EJE RELS MOT 2B 9 9 4 4 STRY EJE SENS SIG 9
EJE RELS MOT 1B 10 10 3 3
EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF eject release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 YC15
1 1 1 1 24V1 LED1 1
DF front cover switch 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG MIDDLE MOT 2B 13 13 1 6 LED2 2
MIDDLE MOT 1B 14 14 2 5 LED3 3
3 3 TOP COV SOURCE MIDDLE MOT 2A 15 15 3 4 LED4 4
4 4 TOP COVSIG MIDDLE MOT 1A 16 16 4 3 DF middle motor KEY1 5
5 2 KEY2 6
YC5 ENTRY MOT 2B 17 17 6 1 GND 7
20 20 1 8 1 1 ENG RDY ENTRY MOT 1B 18 18
19 19 2 7 2 2 ENG SEL ENTRY MOT 2A 19 19 1 6 3.3V 8
18 18 3 6 3 3 ENG DI ENTRY MOT 1A 20 20 2 5 MTRY U SENS K 9
17 17 4 5 4 4 ENG DO 3 4
16 16 5 4 5 5 ENG PAU YC21 4 3 DF paper entry motor
15 15 6 3 6 6 DET MIDDLE MOT 1B 1 5 2 YC16
Image PWB 14 14 7 2 7 7 ENG CLK 6 1 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 1 1
8 1 8 8 GND MIDDLE MOT 1A 2 GND 2 2 3 3
YC3 MIDDLE MOT 2A 3 PAP SENS SIG 3 3 2 2 DF eject paper sensor
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND MIDDLE MOT 2B 4
4 4 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5
5 5 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE MOT 1B 2 2 3 2 3 3
PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF side registration
SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1 sensor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 MT
1 13 1 13 A DF side registration motor 2
SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
2 12 2 12 B YC19 SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 1 1 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2
DF side registration
3 11 3 11 C YC6
SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1 sensor 1
1 1 5V
SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 4
4 10 4 10 2 2 3.3V A
SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 GND 7 7 4 1
5 9 5 9 3 3 3.3V
SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 PH ENTRY SENS SIG 8 8 3 2 B PUNCH
6 8 6 8 4 4 GND
7 7 7 7 5 5 GND
SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 3.3V 9 9 2 3 C
1 4
6 6 PHPES REM
PH main PWB 8 6 8 6 7 7 PHMOT REM
EJECT CL 13 MTRY FULL SENS A 10 10 3 3
9 5 9 5 8 8 PU RDY
GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor
24V2 14 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
10 4 10 4 9 9 PU SEL
11 3 11 3 10 10 PU CLK
12 2 12 2 11 11 PU DI
YC10 13 13
13 1 13 1 12 12 PU DO
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 14 14
YC7
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 15 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 BUNDLE SENS A 16 16 3 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 2 2 2 2 DF bundle eject sensor
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 BUNDLE SENS SIG 18 18 1 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 Stapler PAP PRE UP SENS A 19 19 12 1 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 11 2 2 2 DF paper pressing sensor 1
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG 21 21 10 3 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 PAP PRE LOW SENS A 22 22 9 4 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 8 5 2 2 DF paper pressing sensor 2
PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG 24 24 7 6 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 1
TRY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor 2
3
YC13
24V2 1 1 3 1
PAP PRE SOL ACT 2 2 2 2 DF paper pressing solenoid YC20
PAP PRE SOL KEEP 3 3 1 3 SET SENS A 1 1 3 3
GND 2 2 2 2 DF device sensor
YC14 SET SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5V 1 2 1 2
LED 2 1 2 1 Paper LED
DF࣓ࣥᇶᯈ
9-40
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC19 YC7
3.3V 9 9 11 3 11 11 3.3V GND 1 1 3 3
PH_EN_SENS 8 8 12 2 12 12 PH_EN_SENS PH_EN_SENS 2 2 2 2 PH paper entry sensor
GND 7 7 13 1 13 13 GND 3.3V 3 3 1 1
YC9
4 1 4 1 3.3V
PH tank full sensor 3 2 3 2 TNK_FULL YC8 3 1 PH tank full sensor
2 3 2 3 GND 3.3V 1 1 2 2
(photo receptor) 1 4 1 4 TNK_FULL_PLS TNK_FULL_PLS 2 2 1 3 (photo transmitter)
SENS_3.3V 3 3 3 3
GND 4 4 2 2 PH tank set switch
PHTNK_SET 5 5 1 1
SENS_3.3V 6 6 3 3
GND 7 7 2 2 PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 8 8 1 1
SENS_3.3 9 9 3 3
GND 10 10 2 2 PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 11 11 1 1
9-41
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
MIDDLE_MOT 1B 9 9 1 6 MID_EJE_SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
YC3 2 5 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF middle sensor
1 1 4 4 1 1 24V1 MIDDLE_MOT 1A 10 10 3 4 MID_EJE_SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
DF eject cover switch 2 2 3 3 2 2 EJECT_COV_SIG MIDDLE_MOT 2A 11 11 4 3 DF middle motor
5 2 YC21
1 1 2 2 3 3 FRONT _COV_SOURCE MIDDLE_MOT 2B 12 12 6 1 STRY_EJE_SENS A 1 1 3 3
DF front cover switch 2 2 1 1 4 4 FRONT_COV_SIG GND 2 2 2 2 DF sub eject sensor
ENTRY_MOT 1B 13 13 1 6 STRY_EJE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
2 5
YC4 ENTRY_MOT 1A 14 14 3 4
A5 A7 1 7 1 7 1 1 GND ENTRY_MOT 2A 15 15 4 3 DF paper entry motor 3.3V 4 4 4 1 4 4
A3 A6 2 6 2 6 2 2 GND 5 2 GND 5 5 3 2 3 3
A2 A5 3 5 3 5 3 3 ENG RDY ENTRY_MOT 2B 16 16 6 1 STRY FULL SENS SIG 6 6 2 3 2 2
DF sub tray full sensor
A4 A3 4 4 4 4 4 4 ENG SEL STRY FULL SENS PLS 7 7 1 4 1 1
A6 A1 5 3 5 3 5 5 ENG CLK EJE_RELS_MOT 2B 17 17 4 4
A1 A2 6 2 6 2 6 6 ENG DI EJE_RELS_MOT 1B 18 18 3 3 GND 8 8 3 1 3 3
A7 A4 7 1 7 1 7 7 ENG DO EJE_RELS_MOT 2A 19 19 2 2 DF eject release motor ENTRY_SENS SIG 9 9 2 2 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
EJE_RELS_MOT 1A 20 20 1 1 3.3V 10 10 1 3 1 1
Image PWB
LED1 11 11 9 1 7 1 7
YC13 LED2 12 12 8 2 6 2 6
YC5
MTRY_U_SENS K 1 1 4 1 4 1
LED3 13 13 7 3 5 3 5 DF operation
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND LED4 14 14 6 4 4 4 4
GND 2 2 3 2 3 2
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
MTRY_U_SENS SIG 3 3 2 3 2 3 DF tray paper full sensor 2 KEY1 15 15 5 5 3 5 3 PWB
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 KEY2 16 16 4 6 2 6 2
3.3V 4 4 1 4 1 4
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 GND 17 17 3 7 1 7 1
YC14
3.3V 18 18 2 8 3 1
SFT_RELS_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
1 12 YC6
SFT_RELS_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3
MTRY_U_SENS K 19 19 1 9 2 2 DF tray paper full sensor 1
2 11 1 1 GND 1 3
3 10 2 2 GND
SFT_RELS_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF shift release motor
SFT_RELS_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
4 9 3 3 GND
YC22
5 8 4 4 5V
SFT_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 STPLE_SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
6 7 5 5 24V1
MT main PWB 7 6 6 6 24V1
SFT_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
DF shift motor 2
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
SFT_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 STPLE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
8 5 7 7 MT DO
SFT_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1
9 4 8 8 MT DIN
10 3 9 9 MT CLK
SFT_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4 SID_REG_R_SENS A 4 4 12 1 3 3
11 2 10 10 MT SEL
12 1 11 11 MT RDY
SFT_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3
DF shift motor 1
GND 5 5 11 2 2 2 DF side registration sensor 2
SFT_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 SID_REG_R_SENS SIG 6 6 10 3 1 1
SFT_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1
YC7
SID_REG_F_SENS A 7 7 9 4 3 3
12 12 1 1 5V
11 11 2 2 3.3V
GND 8 8 8 5 2 2 DF side registration sensor 1
EJECT_CL 13 13 3 3 SID_REG_F_SENS SIG 9 9 7 6 1 1
10 10 3 3 3.3V
9 9 4 4 GND
2 2 DF eject clutch
24V2 14 14 1 1 GND 10 10 6 7 3 3
8 8 5 5 GND
7 7 6 6 PHPES_REM
PAP_SENS SIG 11 11 5 8 2 2 DF eject paper sensor
YC15 3.3V 12 12 4 9 1 1
6 6 7 7 PHMOT_REM
PH main PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY
PADDLE_MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE_MOT 1B 2 2 3 2 3 3 BUNDLE_SENS A 13 13 3 10
4 4 9 9 PU SEL
PADDLE_MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor GND 14 14 2 11 2 2
3 3 10 10 PU CLK
PADDLE_MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 BUNDLE_SENS SIG 15 15 1 12 1 1 DF bundle eject switch
2 2 11 11 PU DI
1 1 12 12 PU DO
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4
YC8 SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
1 1 1 1 GND
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2
DF side registration motor 2 MTRY HP1 SENS A 16 16 6 1 3 3
2 2 2 2 24V2
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 17 17 5 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
MTRY HP1 SENS SIG 18 18 4 3 1 1
YC7 SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
1 1
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 MTRY HP2 SENS A 19 19 3 4 3 3
2 2 YC9
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 GND 20 20 2 5 2 2
3 3 5 1 5 5 BF RDY
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 MTRY HP2 SENS SIG 21 21 1 6 1 1
DF tray sensor 2
4 4 4 2 4 4 BF SEL
5 5 3 3 3 3 BF CLK
4 1
6 6 2 4 2 2 BF DO
YC17 PADDLE SENS A 22 22 3 2 3 3
7 7 1 5 1 1 BF DI
STPMOT OUT2 1 13 GND 23 23 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
YC3 STPMOT OUT2 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 24 24 1 4 1 1
BF main PWB 4 4 8 8 8
YC10
8 24V2
STPMOT OUT2 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT2 4 10 8 8 2 2 ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
3 3 7 7 7 7 24V2
2 2 6 6 6 6 GND
STPMOT OUT1 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjustment sensor
STPMOT OUT1 6 8 6 6 4 4 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
1 1 5 5 5 5 GND
STPMOT OUT1 7 7
YC5 STPMOT OUT1 8 6 Stapler SFT_SET SENS A 28 28 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 29 29 2 2 DF shift set sensor
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 SFT_SET SENS SIG 30 30 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND YC23
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 SFT_F HP SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF shift sensor 1
YC18 SFT_F HP SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
DRM_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
DRM_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 SFT_R HP SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
DRM_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF relief drum motor GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF shift sensor 2
DRM_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 SFT_R HP SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
Center
1 2 5 2 5 2 5 5 Eject fan 3 SUB_MID_SOL ACT 12 12 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 3 GND 14 14 2 2 DF tray sensor 4
2 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 24V2 SUB_MID_SOL KEEP 13 13 1 3 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 15 15 1 1
SFT_RELS SENS A 16 16 3 3
GND 17 17 2 2 DF Shift release sensor
DF main PWB SFT_RELS SENS SIG 18 18 1 1
9-42
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC3
YC1 1 12 YC7
3 3 1 1 GND GND 2 11 1 1 GND
MB tray sensor 1 2 2 2 2 OFS1 GND 3 10 2 2 GND
1 1 3 3 5V GND 4 9 3 3 GND
5V 5 8 4 4 5V
3 3 4 4 GND 24V 6 7 5 5 24V
MB tray sensor 2 2 2 5 5 OFS2 24V 7 6 6 6 24V
1 1 6 6 5V SDI 8 5 7 7 MT DO
SDO 9 4 8 8 MT DIN
3 3 7 7 GND SCLK 10 3 9 9 MT CLK
MB tray sensor 3 2 2 8 8 OFS3 SEL 11 2 10 10 MT SEL
1 1 9 9 5V READY 12 1 11 11 MT RDY
3 3 13 13 GND
MB tray sensor 5 2 2 14 14 OFS5
1 1 15 15 5V
MB main PWB
16 16 LED
17 17 GND
18 18 TEJS
19 19 5V
1 4 1 3
YC2
2 3 2 2
1 1 5V YC5
3 2 MOTOR _A 1 4 1 4
MOTOR A 2 3 2 3
4 1 3 1 MB conveying motor
2 2 LED MOTOR B 3 2 3 2
MB eject sensor 2 MB eject sensor 1 MOTOR _B 4 1 4 1
YC4
3 3 3 3 GND R24V 1 1 1 1
MB cover switch
MB home position sensor 2 2 4 4 HP SIG 24V 3 3 2 2
1 1 5 5 5V
3 3 6 6 GND
MB tray sensor 6 2 2 7 7 OFS6
1 1 8 8 5V
3 3 9 9 GND
MB tray sensor 7 2 2 10 10 OFS7
1 1 11 11 5V
12 12 GND
13 13 NC
14 14 5V
9-43
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC7 5V 10 3 1
3 4
1 1 GND 2 2
YC9 2 2 GND
GND 11 2 5 BF eject sensor
OUT 12 1 6 1 3
5 5 1 5 3 3 ENG_RDY
4 4 2 4 4 4 ENG_SEL 5V 13 3 1
3 1
3 3 3 3 5 5 ENG_CLK 14 2 2
GND 2 2 BF conveying sensor
2 2 4 2 6 6 ENG_DI 15 1 3 1 3
TRANS PORT
1 1 5 1 7 7 ENG_DO
YC10 YC3 5V 16 3 1 3 1
8 8 8 8 4 4 24V GND 17 2 2 2 2 BF paper detection sensor
DF main PWB 7 7 7 7 3 3 24V PAPER 18 1 3 1 3
6 6 6 6 2 2 GND
5 5 5 5 1 1 YC13 5V 19 3 1 3 1
GND
5V 1 1 10 10 GND 20 2 2 2 2
YC5
2 2
BFside registration sensor 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V STLS2 9 9 WDU_HP 21 1 3 1 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND 3 3 8 8
GND
2 2 2 2 2 2 STLS1 4 4 7 7 5V 22 22 3 1 3 1
GND
STHP 5 5 6 6 GND 23 23 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V BF stapler motor BF brade sensor
STMOT_OUT1 6 6 5 5 BLD_HP 24 24 1 3 1 3
STMOT_OUT1 7 7 4 4
FGND 8 8 3 3 GND 25 3 1 3 1
STMOT_OUT2 9 9 2 2 BULOW_HP 26 2 2 2 2
STMOT_OUT2 10 10
BF adjustment sensor 2
1 1 3.3V 27 1 3 1 3
YC17 GND 28 3 1 3 1
24V2 1 1 3 1 3 1 CARRY_IN 29 2 2 2 2 BF paper entry sensor
3FSOL_ATT 2 2 2 2 2 2 BF feedshift solenoid 3.3V 30 1 3 1 3
3FSOL_HLD 3 3 1 3 1 3
BF main PWB
9-44
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
PHLED_A 4 4 5 5 PHLED_A
PHLED_B 5 5 4 4 PHLED_B
PHLED_C 6 6 3 3 PHLED_C PH paper edge sensor 1
PHLED_D 7 7 2 2 PHLED_D
YC10 PHLED_3.3V 8 8 1 1 PHLED_3.3V
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 RESET 5.0V 9 9 3 3 5.0V
4 MODE PHTNK_FUL 10 10 2 2 PHTNK_FUL PH tank full sensor
GND 11 11 1 1 GND
YC11
1
1 3.3V YC7
2 DBG_TX PHPES_DET 1 1 2 2 PHPES_DET
3 DBG_RX GND 2 2 1 1 GND PH paper edge sensor 2
4 NC
5 GND
YC8
SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_PLS
SENS3.3V 4 4 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 5 5 2 2 GND PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 6 6 1 1 PHMOT_HP
PH main PWB
YC9
PHTNK_SET 1 2 1 1 PHTNK_SET
GND 2 1 2 2 GND PH tank set switch
9-45
2L7/2RL/2TH/2RM/2RN/2ND
YC8 YC17
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 MID EJE SENS A 1 1
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 GND 2 2
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2
DF eject motor MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
GND 4 4 3 1 3 3
ST MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
ST MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 3 1 1
ST MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 DF slide motor
ST MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 1
ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjustment sensor
ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRAY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 MID EJE SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
TRAY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF middle sensor
MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
Main PWB
9-46
10 Installation Guide
PF-7100
(500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7100
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼DŽ
G*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
G*; ྥᆅࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵлDŽ
┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇࠋ
ձ
A
ղ ճ
1
մ
մ
յ
յ ն
ն
շ շ
ո
չ
ո պչ
2
ջ
պ ռ
ջ
ս
ռ վս
ߑ
AA
տ
վ տ
C(M3x8)
ߒ
ߑ
AA
ր
ր
C(M3x8)
3
ց
4
ւ
RR FL RR FL
1 1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1 1
D E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOkSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOlPGᴵGZGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල ') ࡀᗋ㠃᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺ࠊ✰ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱࢺ ( ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾࡅࡿࠋ
5
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
1 RR
FL
D
E
D 1 1 1
D
F E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOkSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOlPGᴵGZGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල ') ࡀᗋ㠃᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺ࠊ✰ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱࢺ ( ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾࡅࡿࠋ
6
փ
ք
ON
7
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端(1)和测试样张(a)的线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034,把[LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)]。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치> 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
<基準値> 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
8
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
9
3 4
$ $ $
㸫 㸩
d e f
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
中心线调节
1.确认纸张的中心(3)和测试样张(d)的线(4)之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > ±0.5mm 以内
2.进入维修保养模式 U034,把[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3]或[Cassette4]。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치> ±0.5mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
センターライン調整
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整をおこなう。
<基準値> ±0.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
10
3 4
$ $ $
㸫 㸩
d e f
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
11
MEMO
2016. 6
303RB56710-02
PF-7110
(1500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7110
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵлDŽ
┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇࠋ
1
ճճ
մ մ
յ
մյ յ
ն
ն
նշ շ
շո
ոչ
ո չչ
պ
2
ճ
պ ջ
ջ ռ
ߑ
AA
ս
ռմ յ
ս
ߒ
C(M3x8)
ߑ
AA
վն
վ շ
C(M3x8)
տո չ
3
ր
RR FL RR FL
1
1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1
1
D E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
놹鵹ꗞ덵ꮕ ') 閵ꗉ鲚ꐩ꾅뇆덵鷕ꯍ넽鵹ꈒ霡ꐂ᧤᧥냹몒뼩驍ꩡ06멵넩뱭 ( 閶闑ꈑ렍뼞鱽鲙
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල ') ࡀᗋ㠃᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺ࠊ✰ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱࢺ ( ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾࡅࡿࠋ
4
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
RR
1
FL
D
E
D 1 1
1
D
E E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖DŽ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOkSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOlPGᴵGZGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල ') ࡀᗋ㠃᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺ࠊ✰ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱࢺ ( ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾࡅࡿࠋ
5
ց
ߑ
ւ
ON
6
Changing paper size
A4 B5
Modification du format du papier
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩ ߑ
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
⏝⣬ࢧࢬኚ᭦
ߒ
ղ ճ
մ յ
1 պ
ն շ
7
ո
2 ս
2ࠉս
8
ռ ս
տ ր
ᢗ㹼㔤⁑؞ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊDŽ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ⏝⣬ࢧࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
9
A4 Letter
10
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
11
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
ᢗ㹼㔤⁑؞ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊDŽ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ⏝⣬ࢧࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
12
Letter A4
ձ
ճ
* Service Parts
Parts No.
* 303RC1008_
*
*
*
13
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
ߑ ߒ
ߔ ߓ
14
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
ᢗ㹼㔤⁑؞ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊDŽ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ⏝⣬ࢧࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
15
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端(1)和测试样张(a)的线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034,把[LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)]。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치> 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
<基準値> 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
16
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
17
3 4
$ $ $
㸫 㸩
d e f
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
中心线调节
1.确认纸张的中心(3)和测试样张(d)的线(4)之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > ±0.5mm 以内
2.进入维修保养模式 U034,把[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3]或[Cassette4]。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치> ±0.5mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
センターライン調整
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、 次の手順で調整をおこなう。
<基準値> ±0.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
18
3 4
$ $ $
㸫 㸩
d e f
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
19
MEMO
2016. 6
303RC56710-02
PF-7120
(3000 sheets Side Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7120
A D J B
C
L
K* F
M N
H
G(M4x8) E(M4x8P)
I AA
MFP
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼DŽ
K*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
K*; ྥᆅࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵлDŽ
┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇࠋ
ձ ղ
1
մ
ն շ
2
չ
ջ ռ
3
ս վ
տ ր
ւ փ
4
ք
ध B
B 18 mm
5
न
6
प फ
ब भ
7
र
D
D
E(M4x8P)
E(M4x8P)
ळ ऴ
8
०
C
१ २
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
३
H
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
9
५ ६
ߑ
J
E(M4x8P)
ߒ
AA
७
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
G(M4x8) a b
९ ॰
ON
10
A4 B5
Changing paper size
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
⏝⣬ࢧࢬኚ᭦
11
ճ
մ յ
Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le
format du papier.
ᢗ㹼㔤⁑؞ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊDŽ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G
䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ
⏝⣬ࢧࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
12
Adjusting the cursor width
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding,
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
⑮ḽᇳᓜⲺ䈹㢸
Ćྲ᷌⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷ሿˈਟ㜭䙐ᡀн㓨ˈ⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷བྷˈࡉਟ㜭ਁ⭏↚ᯌ䘋㓨ㅹᛵߥDŽ
䀘㉐G䔡G㦤㥉
䀘㉐G䔡㢨G㣅㡰⮨GⱨἽ㫴SG䀘㉐G䔡㢨G䆠⮨Gᷱ㇠Ἵ㫴G☥㢨Gⵐ㈑䚔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㏩⏼␘U
࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡢㄪᩚ
࣮ͤ࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀᑠࡉ࠸↓⤥⣬ࠊ࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀࡁ࠸ᩳࡵ⤥⣬࡞ࡀⓎ⏕ࡍࡿྍ⬟ᛶࡀ࠶ࡿࠋ
0.5~1.0 mm
13
2
1
2
a b c
English
Adjusting the center line
1.Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the center (2) of a test pattern. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust
the gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Français
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier la déviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) d'une forme d'essai. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Español
Ajuste de la línea central
1.Compruebe la desviación entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y el centro (2) de un patrón de prueba. Si la separación supera el valor de ref-
erencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Deutsch
Einstellen der Mittenlinie
1.Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prüfmusters. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Italiano
Regolazione della linea centrale
1.Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il centro (2) di un modello di prova. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferi-
mento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
简体中文
中心线调节
1.确认标准图像 (a) 的中心位置 (1) 与测试图案的中心位置 (2) 的偏移。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > ±2.0mm 以内
2.进入维修保养模式 U034,把[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5]。
한국어
센터라인 조정
1.적정화상 (a) 의 센터 (1) 와 테스트패턴의 센터 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치> ±2.0mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
センターライン調整
1.適正画像 (a) のセンター(1) とテストパターンのセンター(2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
<基準値> ±2.0mm 以内。
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] を選択する。
14
2
1
2
a b c
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern is within the refer-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. ence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
15
MEMO
2016. 2
303RL56710-01
DP-7100
(Document processor: RADF)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7100
A B C D E F
G(M4x10) H I(M3x8)
ձ
230V (Europe)
K J
ղ ճ
մ յ
1
ն շ
0mm
B
1mm
ո չ
2
ռ
վ տ
ր ց ւ
3
փ
G(M4x10)
ք द
K
J
H I(M3x8)
4
ध
ON
5
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作,准备一张 A3 原稿(a),距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线(b)并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线(c)。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿(a)并进行测试复印,确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
6
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿(a),如果偏移值在标准值以上时,对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
(注意)如果图像出现底灰,用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置,则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整。
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
(주의) 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
7
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 10. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 13. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page17. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 10. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 13. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 17 <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 10. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 13. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 17. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 10. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 13. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整,否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度 第 10 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度 第 13 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值 第 17 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、 正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 10 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 13 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・等倍度確認 17 ページ <基準値> ±1.5% 以内
8
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 19. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 21. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 23.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 19. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 21. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 23.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 19. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 21. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 23.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 19. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 21. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 23.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 19. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 21. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 23.
・确认前端定时调整 第 19 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线 第 21 页 < 标准值 >
单面 :±2.0mm 以内,
双面 :±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时,可以同时自动进行等倍值,前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 第 23 页
9
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内。
双面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준체>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内
10
ղ
2.
2. ճ
3. 3.
4
մ
4.
4.
Adjust the position of the DP unit (A). Regolare la posizione dell'unità DP (A).
Loosen the adjusting screw (5). Allentare la vite di regolazione (5).
For
5. copy example (d): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine rear (). Per un esempio di copia (d):
For copy example (e): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine front (). Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso il retro della macchina ( ).
Tighten the adjusting screw (5). Per un esempio di copia (e):
Perform a test copy. Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso la parte anteriore della macchina ( ).
Stringere la vite di regolazione (9).
Eseguire una copia di prova.
Stellen Sie die Position der DP-Einheit (A) ein. '3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࡢ⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (5). ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (d): ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ G ࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Geräterückseite ( ). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ H ࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (e): ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Gerätevorderseite ( ). ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Die Einstellschraube (5) festziehen.
Eine Testkopie erstellen.
11
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6.After the adjustment, install the inner cover (4) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (3).
7.Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 9 on page 2).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6.Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (3).
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 9 à la page 2.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6.Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (4) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (3).
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 9 en la página 2).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (3).
7.Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 9 auf Seite 2).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6.Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (4), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (3).
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 9 a pagina 2).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内
6.调整结束后,重新安装在步骤 3 中取下的内部盖板 (4)。关闭 DP 盖板(3)。
7.拆下原稿垫(C),参照第 2 页的步骤 9 再次装上。
12
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值。如果超过标准值时,必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
13
8.2. ղ ճ
3.
4
3
մ
4. յ
5.
4
4
3
3
Réglez la hauteur du DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖDŽ
Desserrez l’écrou (3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅DŽ
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5 mm (5) ⇿ṬⲴ〫ࣘ䟿˖㓖PP˄˅
Resserrez l’écrou (3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹ṧ㍗പྭDŽ
Adjust
Adjust the
the height
height of
of DP.
DP. Regolazione
Regolazione dell’altezza
dell’altezza del
del DP
DP
Loosen
Loosen the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Allentare
Allentare ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
Ajuste
For la
copyaltura del
example DP.(f): kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
For la
Afloje copy example
tuerca (f): Loosen
(3). (g): Loosen the the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U di copia
copia (f):
(f): Allentare
Allentare la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
For
Forlacopy
copy example
example (g): Tighten
Tighten the
theeladjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (g):
(g): Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
Para copia
Retighten de
the muestra
nut (3). (f): Afloje tornillo de ajuste(4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
(4).
Retighten the nut (3).
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (4). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (5) XᵐGⷴ䞈⣽ஔ㚱WU\O\P
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Réglez
Réglez la
la hauteur
hauteur du
du DP.
DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖDŽ
䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖDŽ
Desserrez
Desserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅DŽ
ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅DŽ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (f):
l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez
Desserrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4).
Die l’exemple
Höhe des DP de copie (g):
einstellen. Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅DŽ
Resserrez
Lösen Sie diel’écrou
Resserrez Mutter(3).
l’écrou (3).
(3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹ṧ㍗പྭDŽ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹ṧ㍗പྭDŽ
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ I ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (4) festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ J ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm (5) ┠┒ࡾᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ㔞㸸⣙PP
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest. ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ajuste
Ajuste la
la altura
altura del
del DP.
DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
Afloje
Afloje la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (f):
(f): Afloje
Afloje el
el tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (g):
(g): Apriete
Apriete elel tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Vuelva
Vuelva a a apretar
apretar la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Die
Die Höhe
Höhe des
des DP
DP einstellen.
einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
Lösen
Lösen Sie die Mutter
Sie die Mutter (3).
(3). ࢼࢵࢺ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (f)
(f) :: Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4).
(4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ II ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ
ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die
Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4)
(4) festziehen.
festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ JJ ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ
ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ziehen
Ziehen Sie
Sie die
die Mutter
Mutter (3)
(3) wieder
wieder fest.
fest. ࢼࢵࢺ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
14
ն
6.
շ
7.
ո
8.
չ
9.
պ
10.
ջ
11.
15
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
12.再次进行测试复印。
13.反复操作步骤 1~12,直至复印样张的线(2)为标准值内。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
12.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
13.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ~ 12 を繰り返す。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
16
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2.Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
17
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
18
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head :调整前端对位 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail :调整后端对位 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > Back Head :调整前端对位 ( 反面 )
线(2)的上下偏移值 :±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail :调整后端对位 ( 反面 )
19
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.21 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,21 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,21 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,21 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
20
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
21
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
22
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 4.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 3 until "OK" appears.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2.Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3.Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 4.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2.Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3.Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
2.Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start- wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 3.Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2.Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK".
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
23
5mm
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare "OK".
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
24
2016. 2
303R756710-01
DP-7110
(Document processor: CIS)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7110
A B(L) B(R) C(M4x14) D E F G
I P
L M
K(M3x8)
H(M3x8 BLACK) J
ղ C(M4x14)
ճ
B(L) C(M4x14)
A
B(R)
մ C(M4x14) յ
D
C(M4x14)
1
ն շ
E C(M4x14)
շ շ-2
ո շ-2
ߑ
շ-2
ߑ ߒ
ߓ ߔ
2
ߕ ߖ
ߗ ߘ
ո չ
F
G
H(M3x8 BLACK)
պ ջ
3
ռ ս
վ ࠉտ
ր ց
4
փ
द ध
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
5
न ऩ
प फ
ब भ
N
O
6
य
ON
7
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作,准备一张 A3 原稿(a),距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线(b)并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线(c)。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿(a)并进行测试复印,确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
8
20mm 20mm
c
20mm A
b B
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿(a),如果偏移值在标准值以上时,对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
(注意)如果图像出现底灰,用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置,则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
(주의) 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
9
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 12. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 15. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page 18. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 12. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 15. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 18. <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 12. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 15. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 18. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 12. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 15. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 18. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整,否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度 第 12 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度 第 15 页 < 标准值 > 单面 :±3.0mm 以内,双面 :±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值 第 18 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、 正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 12 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 15 ページ <基準値>片面:±3.0mm 以内、
両面:±4.0mm 以内
・等倍度確認 18 ページ <基準値> ±1.5% 以内
10
A
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 20. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 22. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 24.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 20. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 22. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 24.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 20. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 22. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 24.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 22. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 24.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 22. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 24.
・确认前端定时调整 第 20 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线 第 22 页 < 标准值 >
单面 :±2.0mm 以内,
双面 :±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时,可以同时自动进行等倍值,前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 第 24 页
11
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值,则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内。
双面复印时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이:±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
<基準値>片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ:±4.0mm 以内
12
B (L) / B (R)
A
C
C
B
B (L)
B (R)
2. Remove the left hinge cover (F) and the angle control fitting (E). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14 screws (C) on the left and right fixing fittings (B(L))(B(R)).
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (F) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (E). Desserrer les 2 vis M4 × 14 (C) sur les fixations gauche et
droite (B(L))(B(R)).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (F) y el herraje de control de ángulo (E). Afloje los 2 tornillos M4 × 14 (C) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho
(B(L))(B(R)).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (F) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (E) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14 Schrauben (C) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen
(B(L))(B(R)) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (F) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (E). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14 (C) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di fissaggio
(B(L))(B(R)) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.좌 힌지커버 (F) 및 각도 고정쇠 (E) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (B(L))(B(R)) 의 나사 M4x14(C) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우:조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 .
샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 : 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량:약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
13
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14 screws (C) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 1).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis M4 × 14 (C) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1) .
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos M4 × 14 (C) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14 Schrauben (C), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14 (C) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时,线(2)的左右偏移值 :±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后,重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14 螺丝(C)。
7.拆下原稿垫(M),参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
14
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿(a)上的线(1)和复印样本上的线(2)的偏移值。如果超过标准值时,必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
<기준치>단면의 경우:±3.0m 이내
양면의 경우:±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
15
3
5
A
B
6
9
8
7
4 10
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 5 on page 1).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6. Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a
tornillo de ajuste (9). colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
16
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6,直至复印样张的线(2)为标准值内。
< 标准值 > 单面时 :±3.0mm 以内
双面时 :±4.0mm 以内
7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ~ 6 を繰り返す。
<基準値>片面の場合:±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合:±4.0mm 以内
17
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B X
X'
2 X'
X
2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification
according to the following procedure. Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
<Valor de referencia> escáner
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo compreso fra ±1,5%
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa proce- 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner.
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere com- Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner
preso fra ±1,5%
18
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
X
X'
X'
X B
2 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3.Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
19
2.5mm
A 2.5mm
2
B 2
1
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.
<Valeur de référence> CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.
<Valore di riferimento>
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
20
2.5mm
2.5mm A
2
2 B
1
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.3 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,3 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,3 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,3 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
21
A
2
B 2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
22
A
2
2mm/ B
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,085 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,085 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
23
A
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 5.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until "OK" appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière.
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer 5. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
l'original de réglage. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message "OK"
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 5.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca "OK"
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un en la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das 5. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 5. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare "OK".
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
24
5mm
A
F 149 1mm B
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until “OK” appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca “OK”
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
25
5mm
A
B F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until “OK” appears.
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FD(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out rear-side adjustment.
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arri- 6.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.
ère) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
lequel F et R sont indiqués. jusqu'à ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
5.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FD(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage du côté
arrière.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca “OK”
5.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FD(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
reverso.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird. fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FD(ChartB)] und die Start- holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung aus- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
führen zu lassen.
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. Se compare
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FD(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione del lato pos- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
teriore.
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FD(ChartB)], 시작키 순서로 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ~ 5 를 반복합니다 .
뒷면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
26
MEMO
MEMO
2016. 2
303R856710-01
DP-7120
(Document processor: RADF)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7120
A B C D E
230V (Europe)
ձ H G
ղ ճ
մ յ
1
ն
0mm
B
1mm
շ ո
պ ջ
2
ռ
ս վ
տ ր
3
ւ
փ H
ք
ON
4
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作,准备一张 A3 原稿(a),距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线(b)并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线(c)。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿(a)并进行测试复印,确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電